ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

UNIVERSITY DEPARTMENTS
REGULATIONS – 2019
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
B.E. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING

THE VISION OF THE DEPARTMENT OF AEROSPACE ENGINEERING

The Department of Aerospace Engineering shall strive to be a globally known department,

committed for its academic excellence, professionalism and societal expectations. The
Department aims to impart state of the art technical knowledge, practical skills, leadership
qualities, team spirit, ethical values and entrepreneurial skill to make all the students capable of
taking up any task relevant to the area of Aerospace Engineering.

THE MISSION OF THE DEPARTMENT OF AEROSPACE ENGINEERING

The Mission of the Department of Aerospace Engineering is to

 Prepare the students to have a very good fundamental knowledge to meet the present
and future needs of industries.
 Improve the technical knowledge of the students in tune with the current requirements
through collaboration with industries and research organization.
 Make the students gain enough knowledge in various aspects of system integration.
 Motivate the students to take up jobs in national laboratories and aerospace industries
of our country.
 Take up inter and multidisciplinary research, sponsored and consultancy projects with
industries and research establishments.
 Encourage the faculty members and students to do research and to update with the
latest developments in the area of Aerospace Engineering.

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOS)

PEO I: Adaptability to industry: Graduates of the programme will receive adequate
academic input to adapt themselves in any aircraft and allied industries

PEO II: Successful Career Development: Graduates of the programme will have successful
technical and professional careers in Aeronautical and allied industries and management.

PEO III: Motivation for Higher Studies: Graduates of the programme will have motivation to
pursue higher studies and acquire masters and research degrees

PEO IV: Contribution to Aeronautical Field: Graduates of the programme will have
innovative ideas and potential to contribute for the development and current needs of the
aeronautical industries.

PEO V: Sustainable interest for Lifelong learning: Graduates of the programme will have
sustained interest continuously to learn and adapt new technology and development to meet
the changing industrial scenarios.
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
After going through the four years of study, Aeronautical Engineering Graduates will exhibit
the following.
PO Graduate Attribute Programme outcome
1. Engineering Knowledge a. Graduate will demonstrate strong basics in
mathematics, science and engineering.
2. Problem Analysis b. Graduate will demonstrate the ability to design, analyse
and conduct experiments, as well as to interpret data.
3. Design/Development of c. Graduate will demonstrate the ability to design a
solutions system or a component to meet the design
requirements and other professional fields.
4. Conduct of Investigations d. Graduate will acquire the capability to identify,
of Complex problems formulate and solve complex engineering problems of
Aeronautical Engineering and aerospace subsystems.
5. Modern tool usage e. Graduate will become familiar with modern engineering
tools and analyze the problems within the domains of
Aeronautical Engineering as a member of
multidisciplinary teams.
6. The Engineer and Society f. Graduates will be able to contribute to society by way
of becoming good academicians or scientists/engineers
in aircraft and aerospace industry for the development
of aircraft and aerospace systems that are less noisy,
produce less pollution and cheaper transport.
7. Environment and g. Graduate will exhibit the awareness of contemporary
sustainability issues focusing on the necessity to develop new
material, design, testing and solution for environmental
problems pertaining to aircraft and aerospace industry.
8. Ethics h. Graduate will demonstrate an understanding of
professional and ethical responsibility with reference to
their career in the field of Aeronautical Engineering and
other professional fields.
9. Individual and Team work i. Graduate will be trained towards developing and
understanding the importance of design and
development of Airplanes from system integration point
of view.
10. Communication j. Graduate will be able to communicate effectively both in
verbal and non-verbal forms. Graduates will have a firm
scientific, technological and communication base that
helps them to find a placement in the Aircraft industry
and R & D organisations related to Aero Engineering
and other professional fields.
11. Project Management and k. Graduates will be capable of developing cost effective
Finance solutions for development of aircraft and aerospace
subsystems.
12. Lifelong Learning l. Graduate will be capable of understanding the value for
life-long learning. Graduate will be capable of doing
higher studies and research in inter and
multidisciplinary areas.

Mapping PEO with POs:

PEO/PO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
I √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
II √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
III √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

IV √ √ √ √ √ √ √
V √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
 MAPPING OF COURSE OUTCOMES WITH PROGRAMME OUTCOMES:

Subjects/PO Category Sem/Year PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

Technical English HSMC I/I

Engineering Mathematics-I BSC I/I
Engineering Physics BSC I/I
Engineering Chemistry BSC I/I
Engineering Graphics ESC I/I √ √ √ √ √
Basic Sciences Laboratory BSC I/I
Workshop Practices Laboratory ESC I/I √ √ √ √
Professional Communication HSMC II/I
Engineering Mathematics-II BSC II/I
Materials Science BSC II/I
Problem Solving and Python Programming ESC II/I √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Basics of Electrical and Electronics Engineering ESC II/I √ √ √ √ √
Engineering Mechanics ESC II/I √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Problem Solving and Python Programming
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory ESC II/I
Electrical and Electronics Engineering
Laboratory ESC II/I √ √ √ √ √ √
Subjects/PO Category Sem/YearPO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
Transform Techniques and Partial Differential
Equations BSC III/II
Elective – Humanities I HSMC III/II
Aero Engineering Thermodynamics PCC III/II √ √ √ √ √ √
Solid Mechanics PCC III/II √ √ √ √ √ √
Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines PCC III/II √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Elements of Aeronautical Engineering PCC III/II √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Thermodynamics and Strength of Materials PCC III/II
Laboratory √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Fluid Mechanics Laboratory PCC III/II √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Elective – Humanities II
HSMC IV/II
Environmental Science PCC IV/II √ √ √
Low Speed Aerodynamics PCC IV/II √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Air breathing Propulsion PCC IV/II √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Aircraft Performance PCC IV/II √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Advanced Solid Mechanics PCC IV/II √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Propulsion Laboratory PCC IV/II √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Aerodynamics laboratory PCC IV/II √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Subjects/PO Category Sem/Year PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
Management Science HSMC IV/II √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
High Speed Aerodynamics PCC V/III √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Rocket Propulsion PCC V/III √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Aircraft Structures PCC V/III √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Aircraft Structures Laboratory PCC V/III √ √ √ √ √
Industrial Training/Internship* EEC V/III √ √ √ √ √ √
Aircraft Stability and Control PCC VI/III √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Computational Fluid Dynamics PCC VI/III √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Composite Materials and Structures PCC VI/III √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Aircraft Design Project –I PCC VI/III √ √ √ √ √
Flight Training Laboratory EEC VI/III √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Subjects/PO Category Sem/Year PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
Experimental Aerodynamics PCC VII/IV √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Finite Element Method PCC VII/IV √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Rockets and Missiles PCC VII/IV √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Aircraft Design Project-II PCC VII/IV √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Project I EEC VII/IV √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Project II EEC VII.IV √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES

Subjects/PO Category Sem/Year PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

Aircraft Rules and Regulations CAR I & II √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Elements of Heat Transfer √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Experimental Stress Analysis PEC I V/III √ √ √ √ √ √
Mechanics of Machines √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Wind Engineering
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Aircraft Engine Repairs and Maintenance √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Boundary Layer Theory VI/III √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
PEC II
Design of Gas Turbine Engine Components √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Manufacturing Processes √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Theory of Elasticity √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Advanced Aerospace Materials √ √ √ √ √ √
Aircraft Design √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Fundamentals of Control Engineering PEC III √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Theory of Vibration √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Principles and Applications of Total Quality
Management √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Aero Elasticity √ √ √ √ √ √
Airframe Repair and Maintenance √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Missile Aerodynamics √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Numerical Heat Transfer PEC IV √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Structural Dynamics VII/IV √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Aircraft Systems Engineering √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Avionics Systems √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Fatigue and Fracture Mechanics √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Helicopter Engineering PEC V √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Space Mechanics √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Approximate Methods in Structural Mechanics √ √ √ √ √ √
Combustion in Aerospace Vehicles √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
PEC VI
Hypersonic Aerodynamics √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Satellite Technology √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
VIII/IV
UAV System Design √ √ √ √ √ √
Operations Research √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Helicopter Maintenance PEC VII √ √ √ √ √ √
Smart Materials and Structures √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Non-conventional Energy Resources √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES

1. Strong Foundation Knowledge

After completing the course, the graduate will have strong basics in aeronautical sciences which will help him/her to pursue
either higher studies or seek employment in aeronautical or allied fields. The strong foundation knowledge will help the graduate
to become a brilliant academician, a successful engineer/scientist or even an entrepreneur.

2. Useful Deliverables to Society

The graduate will have the ability to help society by way of his participation in delivering useful products and services to society
through his/her work in industry, research organisation, educational institution, business organisation etc as he/she has strong
basic knowledge in aeronautical engineering& ethics and is environmentally conscious.

3. Desire to have Lifelong Learning

The curriculum and syllabus have been framed in such a way to impart desire to the graduate to acquire knowledge, on
continuous basis even after completing the programme. This would help the graduate to excel in the line of profession he/she
has chosen.

4. Ability to work as Team Member

Graduate will be able to work as a team member which will be a main requirement in industry or research organisation or in any
business enterprise. This will pave the way for successful career for the graduate and also play a role for the success of the
organisation in which the graduate is employed.
 ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
UNIVERSITY DEPARTMENTS
B.E. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2019
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
CURRICULA AND SYLLABI FOR I - VIII SEMESTERS
(Applicable to students admitted from the Academic Year 2022 – 2023 onwards)
SEMESTER I
Periods per Total
SL. Course
Course Title Category week contact Credits
No. Code
L T P periods
THEORY
1. HS5151 Technical English HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
2. MA5158 Engineering Mathematics - I BSC 3 1 0 4 4
3. PH5151 Engineering Physics BSC 3 0 0 3 3
4. CY5151 Engineering Chemistry BSC 3 0 0 3 3
5. GE5151 Engineering Graphics ESC 1 0 4 5 3
6. தமிழர் மரபு/
GE5154 HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
Heritage of Tamils
PRACTICALS
7. BS5161 Basic Sciences Laboratory BSC 0 0 4 4 2
8. GE5162 Workshop Practices ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
9. GE5163 English Laboratory$ EEC 0 0 2 2 1
Total 14 1 14 29 22
$
Skill Based Course
SEMESTER II
Periods per Total
SL. Course
Course Title Category week contact Credits
No. Code
L T P periods
THEORY
1. HS5251 Professional Communication HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
2. MA5252 Engineering Mathematics II BSC 3 1 0 4 4
3. GE5153 Problem Solving and Python ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
4. EE5251 Basics of Electrical and ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Electronics Engineering
5. GE5152 Engineering Mechanics ESC 3 1 0 4 4
6. PH5251 Materials Science BSC 3 0 0 3 3
7. GE5252 தமிழரும் ததொழில் நுட்பமும் / HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
Tamils and Technology
PRACTICALS
8. GE5161 Problem Solving and Python ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Programming Laboratory
9. EE5261 Electrical and Electronics ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Engineering Laboratory
10. GE5262 Communication Laboratory /
EEC 0 0 4 4 2
Foreign Language$
Total 18 2 12 32 26
$
Skill Based Course
 SEMESTER III

Periods per Total

Course
S.No. Course Title Category week contact Credits
Code
L T P periods
THEORY
1. Elective - Humanities I HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
2. MA5355 Transform Techniques and
BSC 3 1 0 4 4
Partial Differential Equations
3. AE5301 Aero Engineering PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Thermodynamics
4. AE5302 Solid Mechanics PCC 3 0 0 3 3
5. AE5351 Fluid Mechanics and Fluid PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Machines
6. AE5303 Elements of Aeronautical PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
PRACTICALS
7. AE5311 Thermodynamics and PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Strength of Materials
Laboratory
8. AE5312 Fluid Mechanics Laboratory PCC 0 0 2 2 1
9. GE5361 Professional Development$ EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 18 1 8 27 23
$
Skill Based Course

SEMESTER IV

Periods per Total

Course
S.No. Course Title Category week contact Credits
Code
L T P periods
THEORY
1. Elective – Humanities II HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
2. GE5251 Environmental Sciences BSC 3 0 0 3 3
3. AE5401 Low Speed Aerodynamics PCC 3 0 0 3 3
4. AE5402 Advanced Solid Mechanics PCC 3 0 0 3 3
5. AE5403 Air breathing Propulsion PCC 3 0 0 3 3
6. AE5404 Aircraft Performance PCC 3 0 0 3 3
7. Audit Course – I* AC 3 0 0 3 0
PRACTICALS
8. AE5411 Aerodynamics Laboratory PCC 0 0 4 4 2
9. AE5412 Propulsion Laboratory PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Total 21 0 8 29 22

*Audit Course is optional.

 SEMESTER V

Periods per Total

Course
S.No. Course Title Category week contact Credits
Code
L T P periods
THEORY
1. HM5503 Management Science HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
2. AE5501 High Speed Aerodynamics PCC 3 0 0 3 3
3. AE5502 Aircraft Structures PCC 3 0 0 3 3
4. AE5503 Rocket Propulsion PCC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Professional Elective I PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Audit Course – II* AC 3 0 0 3 0
PRACTICALS
7. AE5511 Aircraft Structures PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
8. AE5512 Industrial EEC 0 0 4 4 2
Training/Internship**
Total 18 0 8 26 19
*Audit Course is optional.

** The students will undergo industrial training / Internship during previous vacation

SEMESTER VI

Periods per Total

Course
S.No. Course Title Category week contact Credits
Code
L T P periods
THEORY
1. AE5601 Aircraft Stability and Control PCC 3 0 0 3 3
2. AE5602 Composite Materials and PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Structures
3. AE5603 Computational Fluid PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Dynamics
4. Professional Elective II PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Professional Elective III PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Open Elective I OEC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
7. AE5611 Aircraft Design Project I PCC 0 0 4 4 2
8. AE5612 Flight Training Laboratory PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Total 18 0 8 26 22
 SEMESTER VII

Periods per Total

Course
S.No. Course Title Category week contact Credits
Code
L T P periods
THEORY
1. AE5701 Finite Element Method PCC 3 0 0 3 3
2. AE5702 Rockets and Missiles PCC 3 0 0 3 3
3. AE5703 Experimental PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Aerodynamics
4. Professional Elective IV PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Professional Elective V PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Open Elective II OEC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
7. AE5711 Aircraft Design Project II PCC 0 0 4 4 2
8. AE5712 Project I EEC 0 0 6 6 3
Total 18 0 10 28 23

SEMESTER VIII

Periods per Total

Course
S.No. Course Title Category week contact Credits
Code
L T P periods
THEORY
1. Professional Elective VI PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. Professional Elective VII PEC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
3. AE5811 Project II EEC 0 0 16 16 8
Total 6 0 16 22 14

TOTAL NUMBER OF CREDITS: 171

 HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES (HSMC) – MANAGEMENT AND OTHERS

Periods per week Total

Sl. Course
Course Title Contact Credits
No Code L T P Periods
1. HS5151 Technical English 4 0 0 4 4
2. GE5154 தமிழர் மரபு /Heritage of Tamils 1 0 0 1 1
GE5252 தமிழரும் ததொழில் நுட்பமும் / 1
3. 1 0 0 1
Tamils and Technology
4. HS5251 Professional Communication 4 0 0 4 4
5. HM5503 Management Science 3 0 0 3 3

HSMC– ELECTIVES – HUMANITIES I (ODD SEMESTER)

Sl. Course Periods per week
No Code Course Title Credits
Lecture Tutorial Practical
1. HU5171 Language and 3 0 0 3
Communication
2. HU5172 Values and Ethics 3 0 0 3
3. HU5173 Human Relations at Work 3 0 0 3
4. HU5174 Psychological Processes 3 0 0 3
5. HU5175 Education, Technology and 3 0 0 3
Society
6. HU5176 Philosophy 3 0 0 3
7. HU5177 Applications of Psychology 3 0 0 3
in Everyday Life

HSMC– ELECTIVES – HUMANITIES II (EVEN SEMESTER)

Sl. Course Periods per week
No Code Course Title Credits
Lecture Tutorial Practical
1. HU5271 Gender Culture and
Development 3 0 0 3

2. HU5272 Ethics and Holistic Life 3 0 0 3

3. HU5273 Law and Engineering 3 0 0 3
4. HU5274 Film Appreciation 3 0 0 3
5. HU5275 Fundamentals of Language
and Linguistics 3 0 0 3

6. HU5276 Understanding Society and

Culture through Literature 3 0 0 3
 BASIC SCIENCE COURSE [BSC]
Periods per week Total
Sl. Course
Course Title Contact Credits
No Code L T P Periods
1. MA5158 Engineering Mathematics - I 3 1 0 4 4
2. PH5151 Engineering Physics 3 0 0 3 3
3. CY5151 Engineering Chemistry 3 0 0 3 3
4. BS5161 Basic Sciences Laboratory 0 0 4 4 2
5. MA5252 Engineering Mathematics - II 3 1 0 4 4
6. PH5251 Materials Science 3 0 0 3 3
Transform Techniques 3 1 0 4 4
7. MA5355 and Partial Differential
Equations
8. GE5251 Environmental Sciences 3 0 0 3 4

ENGINEERING SCIENCE COURSE [ESC]

Periods per week Total
Sl. Course
Course Title Contact Credits
No Code L T P Periods
1. GE5151 Engineering Graphics 1 0 4 5 3
2. GE5162 Workshop Practices Laboratory 0 0 4 4 2
3. GE5161 Problem Solving and Python 3 0 0 3 3
programming
4. EE5251 Basics of Electrical and 3 0 0 3 3
Electronics Engineering
5. GE5152 Engineering Mechanics 3 1 0 4 4
6. EE5261 Electrical and Electronics 0 0 4 4 2
Engineering Laboratory
7. GE5161 Problem Solving and Python 0 0 4 4 2
Programming Laboratory

AUDIT COURSES (AC)

Registration for any of these courses is optional to students
Sl. Periods per week Total
Course Course Title Contact Credits
No L T P Periods
Code
1. AD5091 Constitution of India 3 0 0 3 0
2. AD5092 Value Education 3 0 0 3 0
3. AD5093 Pedagogy Studies 3 0 0 3 0
4. AD5094 Stress Management by Yoga 3 0 0 3 0
5. AD5095 Personality Development
Through Life Enlightenment 3 0 0 3 0
Skills
6. AD5096 Unnat Bharat Abhiyan 3 0 0 3 0
7. AD5097 Essence of Indian
3 0 0 3 0
Knowledge Tradition
8. AD5098 Sanga Tamil Literature
3 0 0 3 0
Appreciation
 PROFESSIONAL CORE COURSES [PCC]

Sl. Course Periods per week

Course Title Credits Semester
No Code Lecture Tutorial Practical
1 AE5301 Aero Engineering 3 0 0 3 3
Thermodynamics
2 AE5302 Solid Mechanics 3 0 0 3 3
3 AE5351 Fluid Mechanics and Fluid 3 0 0 3 3
Machines
4 AE5303 Elements of Aeronautical 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
5 AE5311 Thermodynamics and 0 0 4 4 3
Strength of Materials
Laboratory
6 AE5312 Fluid Mechanics Laboratory 0 0 2 1 3
7 AE5401 Low Speed Aerodynamics 3 0 0 3 4
8 AE5402 Advanced Solid Mechanics 3 0 0 3 4
9 AE5403 Air breathing Propulsion 3 0 0 3 4
10 AE5404 Aircraft Performance 3 0 0 3 4
11 AE5411 Aerodynamics Laboratory 0 0 4 2 4
12 AE5412 Propulsion Laboratory 0 0 4 2 4
13 AE5501 High Speed Aerodynamics 3 0 0 3 5
14 AE5502 Aircraft Structures 3 0 0 3 5
15 AE5503 Rocket Propulsion 3 0 0 3 5
16 AE5511 Aircraft Structures Laboratory 0 0 4 2 5
17 AE5601 Aircraft Stability and Control 3 0 0 3 6
18 AE5602 Composite Materials and 3 0 0 3 6
Structures
19 AE5603 Computational Fluid 3 0 0 3 6
Dynamics
20 AE5611 Aircraft Design Project I 0 0 4 2 6
21 AE5612 Flight Training Laboratory 0 0 4 2 6
22 AE5701 Finite Element Method 3 0 0 3 7
23 AE5702 Rockets and Missiles 3 0 0 3 7
24 AE5703 Experimental Aerodynamics 3 0 0 3 7
25 AE5711 Aircraft Design Project II 0 0 4 2 7
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES COURSES

SEMESTER V, ELECTIVE – I
Periods Total
Sl. Course
Course Title Category Per week Contact Credits
No. Code
L T P Periods
1. AE5001 Aircraft Rules and
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Regulations CAR I & II
2. AE5002 Elements of Heat
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Transfer
3. AE5003 Experimental Stress
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Analysis
4. ME5452 Mechanics of Machines PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. AE5004 Wind Engineering PEC 3 0 0 3 3

SEMESTER VI, ELECTIVE – II

Periods Total
Sl. Course
Course Title Category Per week Contact Credits
No. Code
L T P Periods
1. AE5005 Aircraft Engine Repairs
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Maintenance
2. AE5006 Boundary Layer Theory PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. AE5007 Design of Gas Turbine
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engine Components
4. ME5251 Manufacturing Processes PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. AE5008 Theory of Elasticity PEC 3 0 0 3 3

SEMESTER VI, ELECTIVE – III

Periods Total
Sl. Course
Course Title Category Per week Contact Credits
No. Code
L T P Periods
1. AE5009 Advanced Aerospace
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Materials
2. AE5010 Aircraft Design PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. AE5011 Fundamentals of
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Control Engineering
4. AE5012 Theory of Vibration PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. AE5013 Principles and
Applications of Total PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Quality Management

SEMESTER VII, ELECTIVE – IV

Sl. Course Periods Total
No. Code Course Title Category Per week Contact Credits
L T P Periods
1. AE5014 Airframe Repair and
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Maintenance
2. AE5015 Aero Elasticity PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. AE5016 Missile Aerodynamics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. AE5017 Numerical Heat
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Transfer
5. AE5018 Structural Dynamics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
 SEMESTER VII, ELECTIVE – V
Sl. Course Periods Total
No. Code Course Title Category Per week Contact Credits
L T P Periods
1. AE5071 Aircraft Systems
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
2. AE5072 Avionics Systems PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. AE5019 Fatigue and Fracture
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Mechanics
4. AE5020 Helicopter Engineering PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. AE5021 Space Mechanics PEC 3 0 0 3 3

SEMESTER VIII, ELECTIVE – VI

Sl. Course Periods Total
No. Code Course Title Category Per week Contact Credits
L T P Periods
1. AE5022 Approximate Methods in
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Structural Mechanics
2. AE5023 Combustion in Aerospace
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Vehicles
3. AE5024 Hypersonic Aerodynamics PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. AE5025 Satellite Technology PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. AE5026 UAV System Design PEC 3 0 0 3 3

SEMESTER VIII, ELECTIVE – VII

Periods Total
Sl. Course
Course Title Category Per week Contact Credits
No. Code
L T P Periods
1. IE5552 Operations Research PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. AE5027 Helicopter Maintenance PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. AE5028 Smart Materials and
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Structures
4. AE5029 Non-conventional
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Energy Resources

EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES (EEC)

Periods per Total

SL. Course
Course Title Category week contact Credits
No. Code
L T P periods
1. GE5163 English Laboratory$ EEC 0 0 2 2 1
2. GE5262 Communication
Laboratory / Foreign EEC 0 0 4 4 2
Language$
3. GE5361 Professional
EEC 0 0 2 2 1
Development$
4. AE5512 Industrial EEC 0 0 4 4 2
Training/Internship**
5. AE5712 Project I EEC 0 0 6 6 3
6. AE5811 Project II EEC 0 0 16 16 8
 SUMMARY

B.E.(AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING)
Credits per Semester Credits
Sl.No Subject Area
I II III IV V VI VII VIII Total
1 HSMC 4 3 3 3 3 - - - 16
2 BSC 12 7 4 3 0 - - - 23
3 ESC 5 14 - - 0 - - - 19
4 PCC - - 15 16 11 13 11 66
5 PEC - - - - 3 6 6 6 21
6 OEC - - - - 0 3 3 - 6
7 EEC 1 2 1 - 2 0 3 8 17
8 AC - - - - 0 0 - - 0
Total 22 26 23 22 19 22 23 14 171
HS5151 TECHNICAL ENGLISH L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
 To build lexical competency and accuracy that will help learners to use language effectively.
 To learn various reading strategies that will enable learners to comprehend the different
modes of reading materials of varied levels of complexity.
 To comprehend the linguistic aspects of various rhetorical structures and functions of
Technical English and use them effectively in writing.

UNIT I INTRODUCING ONESELF 9

Theory:
Reading: Descriptive passages (From Newspapers / Magazines) – Writing: Writing a coherent
paragraph (Native Place, School Life) – Grammar: Simple present tense, Present continuous tense –
Vocabulary development: One word substitution.

UNIT II DIALOGUE WRITING 9

Theory:
Reading: Reading a print interview (Comprehension and inference questions) - Writing: Writing a
checklist - Dialogue writing – Grammar: Simple past tense – Question formation (Wh-Questions,
‘Yes’ or ‘No’ Questions, Tag Questions) – Vocabulary Development: Lexical items relevant to the
theme of the given unit.

UNIT III FORMAL LETTER WRITING 9

Theory:
Reading: Reading motivational essays on famous Engineers and Technologists (Answering Open –
Ended and Closed Questions) – Writing: Writing formal letters/ emails – Grammar: Future tenses,
Subject and verb agreement - Vocabulary Development: Collocations – Fixed expressions.

UNIT IV WRITING LETTERS OF COMPLAINT 9

Theory:
Reading: Reading Problem – Solution Articles/Essays Drawn From Various Sources – Writing:
Making Recommendations – Writing a complaint Letter – Letter / email to the Editor – Note Making –
Grammar: Use of modal verbs – Phrasal verbs – Cause-and-effect sentences – Vocabulary
Development: Connectives, Use Of cohesive devices in writing, Technical vocabulary.

UNIT V WRITING DEFINITIONS AND PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 9

Theory:
Reading: Reading graphical material for comparison (Advertisements & Infographics) – Writing:
Writing Definitions - One-line & extended definition – Compare-and-contrast paragraphs - Grammar:
Adjectives – Degrees of comparison – Compound nouns – Compound words - Vocabulary
Development: Use of Discourse Markers – Suffixes (Adjectival endings).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Use appropriate language structures and lexical items in authentic contexts.
 Read both general and technical texts and comprehend their denotative and connotative
meanings.
 Write different kinds of formal documents with grammatical and lexical appropriacy.
Assessment Pattern
 Two written internal assessments to test learner’s progress in grammar, vocabulary, reading
and writing skills.
 End Semester exam to be tested in two parts: Theory exam for three hours and listening and
speaking skills for two hours.
MA5158 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I L T P C
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes in 3 1 0 4
I Semester)

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop the use of matrix algebra techniques that is needed by engineers for
practical applications.
 To familiarize the students with differential calculus.
 To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in many
branches of engineering.
 To make the students understand various techniques of integration.
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and
their applications.
UNIT I MATRICES 12
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of eigenvalues
and eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices – Reduction of a quadratic
form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms.

UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12

Limit of function – One sided limit – Limit Laws – Continuity – left and right continuity – types of
discontinuities – Intermediate Value Theorem – Derivatives of a function - Differentiation rules –
Chain rule – Implicit differentiation – logarithmic differentiation – Maxima and minima – Mean value
theorem – (Optional: Polar coordinate system – Differentiation in polar coordinates).

UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12

Partial derivatives – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Differentiation
of implicit functions – Change of variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions –
Taylor’s series for functions of two variables – Errors and approximations – Maxima and minima of
functions of two variables – Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers.

UNIT IV INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12

Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration - Integration by parts,
Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by partial fraction,
Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals.

UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double and
triple integrals.
TOTAL :60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
 Use the matrix algebra methods for solving practical problems.
 Apply differential calculus tools in solving various application problems.
 Able to use differential calculus ideas on several variable functions.
 Apply different methods of integration in solving practical problems.
 Apply multiple integral ideas in solving areas, volumes and other practical problems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, 44th Edition, New Delhi,
2017.
2. James Stewart, "Calculus with Early Transcendental Functions", Cengage Learning, 6th
Edition, New Delhi,2013.
 3. Joel Hass, Christopher Heil and Maurice D.Weir, "Thomas' Calculus", Pearson, 14th Edition,
New Delhi, 2018.
4. Narayanan S. and Manicavachagom Pillai T. K., “Calculus" Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2009.

REFERENCES:
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall Media (An
imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), 7th Edition, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition,
New Delhi, 2015.
3. Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education2nd Edition, 5th
Reprint, Delhi, 2009.
4. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”,Narosa Publications, 5th
Edition, New Delhi, 2017.
5. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, 7 th
Edition, New Delhi , 2012.
6. Ramana B.V., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Ltd., 11 th Reprint,
New Delhi, 2010.

PH5151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C

(Common to all branches of B.E / B.Tech programmes) 3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students in understanding the importance of mechanics.
 To equip the students on the knowledge of electromagnetic waves.
 To introduce the basics of oscillations, optics and lasers.
 To enable the students in understanding the importance of quantum physics.
 To elucidate the application of quantum mechanics towards the formation of energy bands
in crystalline materials.

UNIT I MECHANICS 9
Moment of inertia (M.I) - Radius of gyration - Theorems of M .I - M.I of circular disc, solid
cylinder , hollow cylinder , solid sphere and hollow sphere - K.E of a rotating body – M.I of a
diatomic molecule – Rotational energy state of a rigid diatomic molecule - centre of mass –
conservation of linear momentum – Relation between Torque and angular momentum -
Torsional pendulum.

UNIT II ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9

Gauss’s law – Faraday’s law - Ampere’s law - The Maxwell’s equations - wave equation; Plane
electromagnetic waves in vacuum, Conditions on the wave field - properties of electromagnetic
waves: speed, amplitude, phase, orientation and waves in matter - polarization - Producing
electromagnetic waves - Energy and momentum in EM waves: Intensity, waves from localized
sources, momentum and radiation pressure - Cell-phone reception. Reflection and transmission
of electromagnetic waves from a non-conducting medium-vacuum interface for normal
incidence.

UNIT III OSCILLATIONS, OPTICS AND LASERS 9

Simple harmonic motion - resonance - waves on a string - standing waves - traveling waves -
Energy transfer of a wave - sound waves - Doppler effect - reflection and refraction of light
waves - total internal reflection - interference - interferometers - air wedge experiment. Theory
of laser - characteristics - Spontaneous and stimulated emission - Einstein’s coefficients -
population inversion - Nd-YAG laser, CO2 laser, semiconductor laser - applications.

UNIT IV BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

Photons and light waves - Electrons and matter waves - The Schrodinger equation (Time
dependent and time independent forms) - meaning of wave function - Normalization - Particle in
a infinite potential well - Normalization, probabilities and the correspondence principle.

UNIT V APPLIED QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

The harmonic oscillator - Barrier penetration and quantum tunneling - Tunneling microscope -
Resonant diode - Finite potential wells - particle in a three dimensional box - Bloch’s theorem for
particles in a periodic potential, Kronig-Penney model and origin of energy bands.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students should able to
 Understanding the importance of mechanics.
 Express the knowledge of electromagnetic waves.
 Know the basics of oscillations, optics and lasers.
 Understanding the importance of quantum physics.
 Apply quantum mechanical principles towards the formation of energy bands in crystalline
materials.

TEXT BOOKS
1. D.Kleppner and R.Kolenkow. An Introduction to Mechanics. McGraw Hill Education, 2017.
2. D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker. Principles of Physics. John Wiley & Sons, 2015.
3. N.Garcia, A.Damask and S.Schwarz. Physics for Computer Science Students. Springer-
Verlag, 2012.

REFERENCES
1. R.Wolfson. Essential University Physics. Volume 1 & 2. Pearson, 2016.
2. D.J.Griffiths. Introduction to Electrodynamics. Pearson Education, 2015
3. K.Thyagarajan and A.Ghatak. Lasers: Fundamentals and Applications. Springer, 2012.

CY5151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C

(COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES) 3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of polymers, their properties and some of the important
applications.
 To impart knowledge on the basic principles and preparatory methods of nanomaterials.
 To facilitate the understanding of the laws of photochemistry, photoprocesses and
instrumentation & applications of spectroscopic techniques.
 To familiarize the operating principles and applications of energy conversion, its processes
and storage devices.
 To inculcate sound understanding of water quality parameters and water treatment
techniques.

UNIT I POLYMER CHEMISTRY 9

Introduction: Functionality-degree of polymerization. Classification of polymers- natural and
synthetic, thermoplastic and thermosetting. Types and mechanism of polymerization: addition
(free radical, cationic, anionic and living); condensation and copolymerization. Properties of
polymers: Tg, tacticity, molecular weight-weight average, number average and polydispersity
index. Techniques of polymerization: Bulk, emulsion, solution and suspension. Structure,
Properties and uses of: PE, PVC, PC, PTFE, PP, Nylon 6, Nylon 66, Bakelite, Epoxy;
Conducting polymers – polyaniline and polypyrrole.

UNIT II NANOCHEMISTRY 9
Basics-distinction between molecules, nanomaterials and bulk materials; size-dependent
properties. Types –nanoparticle, nanocluster, nanorod, nanowire and nanotube. Preparation of
nanomaterials: sol-gel, solvothermal, laser ablation, chemical vapour deposition,
electrochemical deposition and electro spinning. Characterization - Scanning Electron
Microscope and Transmission Electron Microscope - Principle and instrumentation (block
diagram). Properties (optical, electrical, mechanical and magnetic) and Applications of
nanomaterials - medicine, agriculture, electronics and catalysis.

UNIT III PHOTOCHEMISTRY AND SPECTROSCOPY 9

Photochemistry: Laws of photochemistry - Grotthuss-Draper law, Stark-Einstein law and
Lambert-Beer Law (derivation and problems). Photo physical processes – Jablonski diagram.
Chemiluminescence, photo-sensitization and photoquenching – mechanism and examples.
Spectroscopy: Electromagnetic spectrum - absorption of radiation - electronic, vibrational and
rotational transitions. Width and intensities of spectral lines. Atomic absorption spectroscopy,
UV-Vis and IR spectroscopy- principles, instrumentation (Block diagram) and applications.

UNIT IV ENERGY CONVERSIONS AND STORAGE 9

Nuclear fission - controlled nuclear fission - nuclear fusion - differences between nuclear fission
and fusion - nuclear chain reactions - nuclear energy - light water nuclear power plant – fast
breeder reactor. Solar energy conversion - solar cells. Wind energy. Batteries - types of
batteries – primary battery (dry cell), secondary battery (lead acid, nickel-cadmium and lithium-
ion-battery). Fuel cells – H2-O2 and microbial fuel cell. Explosives – classification, examples:
TNT, RDX, Dynamite; Rocket fuels and propellants – definition and uses.

UNIT V WATER TECHNOLOGY 9

Water – sources and impurities – water quality parameters: colour, odour, pH, hardness,
alkalinity, TDS, COD and BOD. Boiler feed water – requirement – troubles (scale & sludge,
caustic embrittlement, boiler corrosion and priming & foaming. Internal conditioning –
phosphate, calgon and carbonate treatment. External conditioning - zeolite (permutit) and ion
exchange demineralization. Municipal water treatment process – primary (screening,
sedimentation and coagulation), secondary (activated sludge process and trickling filter process)
and tertiary (ozonolysis, UV treatment, chlorination, reverse osmosis).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
 To recognize and apply basic knowledge on different types of polymeric materials, their
general preparation methods and applications to futuristic material fabrication needs.
 To identify and apply basic concepts of nanoscience and nanotechnology in designing the
synthesis of nanomaterials for engineering and technology applications.
 To identify and apply suitable spectroscopic technique for material analysis and study
different forms of photochemical reactions.
 To recognize different forms of energy resources and apply them for suitable applications
in energy sectors.
 To demonstrate the knowledge of water and their quality in using at different industries.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain P. C. & Monica Jain., “Engineering Chemistry”, 16th Edition, Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Company (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Sivasankar B., “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 2012.
3. S.S.Dara, “A text book of Engineering Chemistry”, Chand Publications, 2014.

REFERENCES:
1. Schdeva M V, “Basics of Nano Chemistry”, Anmol Publications Pvt Ltd
2. B.Sivasankar, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, Oxford University Press. 2012.
3. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International Ltd.
4. V RGowariker, N V Viswanathan and Jayadev Sreedhar, “Polymer Science” New AGE
International Publishers, 2009.
GE5151 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C
1 0 4 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. Drawing free hand sketches of basic geometrical shapes and multiple views of objects.
2. Drawing orthographic projections of lines and planes.
3. Drawing orthographic projections of solids.
4. Drawing development of the surfaces of objects.
5. Drawing isometric and perspective views of simple solids.

CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (NOT FOR EXAMINATION) 1

Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and
dimensioning.

UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREE HANDSKETCHING 14

Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices-Conics – Construction of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by different methods – Construction of cycloid – construction of
involutes of square and circle – Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles – Representation of
Three-Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Free hand sketching of multiple views from
pictorial views of objects

UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACES 15

Orthographic projection- principles-Principle planes-First angle projection-Projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes-
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and trapezoidal
method and traces Projection of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the
principal planes by rotating object method.

UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 15

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the
axis is inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object method and auxiliary plane
method.

UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES

15
Sectioning of solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of the
principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section. Development
of lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids – Prisms, pyramids cylinders and cones.
Development of lateral surfaces of solids with cut-outs and holes.

UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 12

Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale –Isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions and miscellaneous problems. Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms
pyramids and cylinders by visual ray method and vanishing point method.

COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING (DEMONSTRATION ONLY) 3

Introduction to drafting packages and demonstration of their use
TOTAL (L: 15 + P: 60)=75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Draw free hand sketching of basic geometrical shapes and multiple views of objects.
2. Draw orthographic projections of lines and planes
3. Draw orthographic projections of solids
4. Draw development of the surfaces of objects
5. Draw isometric and perspective views of simple solids.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhatt, N. D.,Panchal V M and Pramod R. Ingle, “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar
Publishing House, 53rd Edition, 2014.
2. Parthasarathy, N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Drawing”, Oxford University Press,
2015

REFERENCES:
1. Agrawal, B. and Agrawal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw, N.Delhi, 2008.
2. Gopalakrishna, K. R., “Engineering Drawing”, Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 2007.
3. Natarajan, K. V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, 28thEd., Dhanalakshmi
Publishers, Chennai, 2015.
4. Shah, M. B., and Rana, B. C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2ndEd., 2009.
5. Venugopal, K. and Prabhu Raja, V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age,2008.

Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:

1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.

Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:

1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only.
4. The students will be permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
5. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 0.9 0.9 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.9 0.6
2 0.9 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
3 0.9 0.9 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
4 0.9 0.6 0.9 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
5 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
GE5154 தமிழர் மரபு LTPC
1 0 01

அலகு I மமொழி மற் றும் இலக்கியம் : 3

இந்திய தமொழிக் குடும் பங் கள் – திரொவிட தமொழிகள் – தமிழ் ஒரு தெம் தமொழி –
தமிழ் தெவ் விலக்கியங் கள் - ெங் க இலக்கியத்தின் ெமயெ் ெொர்பற் ற தன்மம –
ெங் க இலக்கியத்தில் பகிர்தல் அறம் – திருக்குறளில் மமலொண்மமக்
கருத்துக்கள் – தமிழ் க் கொப் பியங் கள் , தமிழகத்தில் ெமண தபௌத்த
ெமயங் களின் தொக்கம் - பக்தி இலக்கியம் , ஆழ் வொர்கள் மற் றும் நொயன்மொர்கள்
– சிற் றிலக்கியங் கள் – தமிழில் நவீன இலக்கியத்தின் வளர்ெ்சி – தமிழ் இலக்கிய
வளர்ெ்சியில் பொரதியொர் மற் றும் பொரதிதொென் ஆகிமயொரின் பங் களிப் பு.

அலகு II மரபு – பொறற ஓவியங் கள் முதல் நவீன ஓவியங் கள் வறர –
சிற் பக் கறல: 3
நடுகல் முதல் நவீன சிற் பங் கள் வமர – ஐம் தபொன் சிமலகள் – பழங் குடியினர்
மற் றும் அவர்கள் தயொரிக்கும் மகவிமனப் தபொருட்கள் , தபொம் மமகள் – மதர்
தெய் யும் கமல – சுடுமண் சிற் பங் கள் – நொட்டுப் புறத் ததய் வங் கள் –
குமரிமுமனயில் திருவள் ளுவர் சிமல – இமெக் கருவிகள் – மிருதங் கம் , பமற,
வீமண, யொழ் , நொதஸ்வரம் – தமிழர்களின் ெமூக தபொருளொதொர வொழ் வில்
மகொவில் களின் பங் கு.

அலகு III நொட்டுப் புறக் கறலகள் மற் றும் வீர விறளயொட்டுகள் : 3

ததருக்கூத்து, கரகொட்டம் , வில் லுப் பொட்டு, கணியொன் கூத்து, ஒயிலொட்டம் ,
மதொல் பொமவக் கூத்து, சிலம் பொட்டம் , வளரி, புலியொட்டம் , தமிழர்களின்
விமளயொட்டுகள் .

அலகு IV தமிழர்களின் திறைக் ககொட்பொடுகள் : 3

தமிழகத்தின் தொவரங் களும் , விலங் குகளும் – ததொல் கொப் பியம் மற் றும் ெங் க
இலக்கியத்தில் அகம் மற் றும் புறக் மகொட்பொடுகள் – தமிழர்கள் மபொற் றிய
அறக்மகொட்பொடு – ெங் ககொலத்தில் தமிழகத்தில் எழுத்தறிவும் , கல் வியும் –
ெங் ககொல நகரங் களும் துமற முகங் களும் – ெங் ககொலத்தில் ஏற் றுமதி மற் றும்
இறக்குமதி – கடல் கடந்த நொடுகளில் மெொழர்களின் தவற் றி.

அலகு V இந் திய கதசிய இயக்கம் மற் றும் இந் திய பை்பொட்டிற் குத்
தமிழர்களின் பங் களிப் பு: 3
இந்திய விடுதமலப் மபொரில் தமிழர்களின் பங் கு – இந்தியொவின்
பிறப் பகுதிகளில் தமிழ் ப் பண்பொட்டின் தொக்கம் – சுயமரியொமத இயக்கம் –
இந்திய மருத்துவத்தில் , சித்த மருத்துவத்தின் பங் கு – கல் தவட்டுகள் ,
மகதயழுத்துப் படிகள் - தமிழ் ப் புத்தகங் களின் அெ்சு வரலொறு.

TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல்
துமற தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in
 print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published
by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services
Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) –
Reference Book.

GE5154 HERITAGE OF TAMILS LTPC

1 0 01
UNIT I LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 3
Language Families in India - Dravidian Languages – Tamil as a Classical Language - Classical
Literature in Tamil – Secular Nature of Sangam Literature – Distributive Justice in Sangam
Literature - Management Principles in Thirukural - Tamil Epics and Impact of Buddhism &
Jainism in Tamil Land - Bakthi Literature Azhwars and Nayanmars - Forms of minor Poetry -
Development of Modern literature in Tamil - Contribution of Bharathiyar and Bharathidhasan.

UNIT II HERITAGE - ROCK ART PAINTINGS TO MODERN ART – SCULPTURE 3

Hero stone to modern sculpture - Bronze icons - Tribes and their handicrafts - Art of temple car
making - - Massive Terracotta sculptures, Village deities, Thiruvalluvar Statue at Kanyakumari,
Making of musical instruments - Mridhangam, Parai, Veenai, Yazh and Nadhaswaram - Role of
Temples in Social and Economic Life of Tamils.
UNIT III FOLK AND MARTIAL ARTS 3
Therukoothu, Karagattam, Villu Pattu, Kaniyan Koothu, Oyillattam, Leather puppetry,
Silambattam, Valari, Tiger dance - Sports and Games of Tamils.
UNIT IV THINAI CONCEPT OF TAMILS 3
Flora and Fauna of Tamils & Aham and Puram Concept from Tholkappiyam and Sangam
Literature - Aram Concept of Tamils - Education and Literacy during Sangam Age - Ancient
Cities and Ports of Sangam Age - Export and Import during Sangam Age - Overseas Conquest
of Cholas.
UNIT V CONTRIBUTION OF TAMILS TO INDIAN NATIONAL MOVEMENT AND
INDIAN CULTURE 3
Contribution of Tamils to Indian Freedom Struggle - The Cultural Influence of Tamils over the
other parts of India – Self-Respect Movement - Role of Siddha Medicine in Indigenous
Systems of Medicine – Inscriptions & Manuscripts – Print History of Tamil Books.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும் கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல்
துமற தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in
print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published
by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services
Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) –
Reference Book.

BS5161 BASIC SCIENCES LABORATORY L T P C

(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes) 0 0 4 2

PHYSICS LABORATORY: (Any Seven Experiments)

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate experimental skills to test basic understanding of physics of materials
including properties of matter, thermal and optical properties.
 To induce the students to familiarize with experimental determination of velocity of
ultrasonic waves and band gap determination.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Torsional pendulum - Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of disc
2. Non-uniform bending - Determination of Young’s modulus
3. Uniform bending – Determination of Young’s modulus
4. Lee’s disc Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor
5. Potentiometer-Determination of thermo e.m.f of a thermocouple
6. Laser- Determination of the wave length of the laser using grating
7. Air wedge - Determination of thickness of a thin sheet/wire
8. a) Optical fibre -Determination of Numerical Aperture and acceptance angle
b) Compact disc- Determination of width of the groove using laser.
9. Acoustic grating- Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves in liquids.
10. Ultrasonic interferometer – determination of the velocity of sound and compressibility of
liquids
11. Post office box -Determination of Band gap of a semiconductor.
12. Spectrometer- Determination of wavelength using gating.
13. Photoelectric effect
14. Michelson Interferometer.
15. Estimation of laser parameters.
16. Melde’s string experiment
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able
 To determine various moduli of elasticity and also various thermal and optical properties
of materials.
 To determine the velocity of ultrasonic waves, band gap determination and viscosity of
liquids

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Minimum of 8 experiments to be conducted)

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate experimental skills to test basic understanding of water quality parameters,
such as, acidity, alkalinity, hardness, DO, chloride and copper.
 To induce the students to familiarize with electroanalytical techniques such as, pH metry,
potentiometry and conductometry in the determination of impurities in aqueous solutions.
 To demonstrate the analysis of metals and polymers by spectroscopy and viscometry
methods.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1. Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as primary standard and Determination of alkalinity in

water sample.
2. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
3. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler‟s method.
4. Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric method.
5. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
6. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
7. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
8. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
9. Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer (1, 10-
Phenanthroline / thiocyanate method).
10. Estimation of sodium and potassium present in water using flame photometer.
11. Determination of molecular weight of polyvinylalcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
12. Pseudo first order kinetics-ester hydrolysis.
13. Corrosion experiment-weight loss method.
14. Phase change in a solid.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
 To analyse the quality of water samples with respect to their acidity, alkalinity, hardness
and DO.
 To determine the amount of metal ions through volumetric and spectroscopic techniques
 To determine the molecular weight of polymers by viscometric method.
 To quantitatively analyse the impurities in solution by electroanalytical techniques
 To design and analyse the kinetics of reactions and corrosion of metals

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Laboratory Manual- Department of Chemistry, CEGC, Anna University (2014).
2. Vogel‟s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (8th edition, 2014).
GE5162 WORKSHOP PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
(Common to all Branches of B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes) 0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES: The main learning objective of this course is to provide hands on
training to the students in:
1. Drawing pipe line plan; laying and connecting various pipe fittings used in common
household plumbing work; Sawing; planing; making joints in wood materials used in
common household wood work.
2. Wiring various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
3. Welding various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machining various simple
processes like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assembling simple mechanical assembly
of common household equipments; Making a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal
work.
4. Soldering and testing simple electronic circuits; Assembling and testing simple electronic
components on PCB.

GROUP – A (CIVIL & ELECTRICAL)

PART I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

PLUMBING WORK:
a) Connecting various basic pipe fittings like valves, taps, coupling, unions,
reducers, elbows and other components which are commonly used in household.
b) Preparing plumbing line sketches.
c) Laying pipe connection to the suction side of a pump
d) Laying pipe connection to the delivery side of a pump.
e) Connecting pipes of different materials: Metal, plastic and flexible pipes used in
household appliances.
WOOD WORK:
a) Sawing,
b) Planing and
c) Making joints like T-Joint, Mortise joint and Tenon joint and Dovetail joint.
Wood Work Study:
a) Studying joints in door panels and wooden furniture
b) Studying common industrial trusses using models.
PART II ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

WIRING WORK:
a) Wiring Switches, Fuse, Indicator and Lamp etc. such as in basic household,
b) Wiring Stair case light.
c) Wiring tube – light.
d) Preparing wiring diagrams for a given situation.
Wiring Study:
a) Studying an Iron-Box wiring.
b) Studying a Fan Regulator wiring.
c) Studying an Emergency Lamp wiring.
GROUP – B (MECHANICAL AND ELECTRONICS)
PART III MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

WELDING WORK:
a) Welding of Butt Joints, Lap Joints, and Tee Joints using arc welding.
b) Practicing gas welding.
BASIC MACHINING WORK:
a) (simple)Turning.
b) (simple)Drilling.
c) (simple)Tapping.
ASSEMBLY WORK:
a) Assembling a centrifugal pump.
b) Assembling a household mixer.
c) Assembling an air conditioner.
SHEET METAL WORK:
a) Making of a square tray
FOUNDRY WORK:
a) Demonstrating basic foundry operations.

PART IV ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

SOLDERING WORK:
a) Soldering simple electronic circuits and checking continuity.
ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY AND TESTING WORK:
a) Assembling and testing electronic components on a small PCB.
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT STUDY:
a) Studying a FM radio.
b) Studying an electronic telephone.
TOTAL = 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Draw pipe line plan; lay and connect various pipe fittings used in common household
plumbing work; Saw; plan; make joints in wood materials used in common household
wood work.
2. Wire various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
3. Weld various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machine various simple
processes like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assemble simple mechanical assembly
of common household equipments; Make a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal
work.
4. Solder and test simple electronic circuits; Assemble and test simple electronic
components on PCB.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3
2 0.6 0.6 0.6
3 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.6
4 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.6
GE5163 ENGLISH LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES :
 To improve the communicative competence of learners
 To help learners use language effectively in academic /work contexts
 To develop various listening strategies to comprehend various types of audio materials like
lectures, discussions, videos etc.
 To build on students’ English language skills by engaging them in listening, speaking and
grammar learning activities that are relevant to authentic contexts.
 To use language efficiently in expressing their opinions via various media.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 6

Listening for general information-specific details- conversation: Introduction to classmates - Audio /
video (formal & informal); Telephone conversation; Listening to voicemail & messages; Listening and
filling a form. Speaking - making telephone calls-Self Introduction; Introducing a friend; - politeness
strategies- making polite requests, making polite offers, replying to polite requests and offers-
understanding basic instructions( filling out a bank application for example).

UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 6

Listening - Listening to podcasts, anecdotes / stories / event narration; documentaries and interviews
with celebrities. Speaking - Narrating personal experiences / events-Talking about current and
temporary situations & permanent and regular situations* - describing experiences and feelings-
engaging in small talk- describing requirements and abilities.

UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 6

Listening - Listen to product and process descriptions; a classroom lecture; and advertisements about
products. Speaking – Picture description- describing locations in workplaces- Giving instruction to use
the product- explaining uses and purposes- Presenting a product- describing shapes and sizes and
weights- talking about quantities(large & small)-talking about precautions.

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 6

Listening – Listening to TED Talks; Listening to lectures - and educational videos. Speaking – Small
Talk; discussing and making plans-talking about tasks-talking about progress- talking about positions
and directions of movement-talking about travel preparations- talking about transportation-

UNIT V EXPRESSION 6
Listening – Listening to debates/ discussions; different viewpoints on an issue; and panel
discussions. Speaking –making predictions- talking about a given topic-giving opinions-
understanding a website-describing processes
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 To listen and comprehend complex academic texts
 To speak fluently and accurately in formal and informal communicative contexts
 To express their opinions effectively in both oral and written medium of communication

ASSESSMENT PATTERN
 One online / app based assessment to test listening /speaking
 End Semester ONLY listening and speaking will be conducted online.
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of listening and speaking internal
test and end semester exam.
HS5251 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION L T PC
2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES

 To comprehend various reading materials relevant to technical context and understand the
main and supporting ideas of the reading materials.
 To write effective job applications along with detailed CV for internship or placements.
 To explore definitions, essay and report writing techniques and practice them in order to
develop associated skills.

UNIT I TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION 6

Theory:
Reading: Reading the Interview of an Achiever and Completing Exercises (Skimming, Scanning and
Predicting) – Writing: Writing a Short Biography of an Achiever Based on Given Hints – Grammar:
Asking and Answering Questions, Punctuation in Writing, Prepositional Phrases

UNIT II SUMMARY WRITING 6

Theory:
Reading: Reading Technical Essays/ Articles and Answering Comprehension Questions – Writing:
Summary Writing – Grammar: Participle Forms, Relative Clauses

UNIT III PROCESS DESCRIPTION 6

Theory:
Reading: Reading Instruction Manuals – Writing: Writing Process Descriptions – Writing Instructions
– Grammar: Use of Imperatives, Active and Passive Voice, Sequence Words

UNIT IV REPORT WRITING 6

Theory:
Reading: Reading and Interpreting Charts/Tables and Diagrams – Writing: Interpreting Charts/Tables
and Diagrams, Writing a Report – Grammar: Direct into Indirect Speech, Use of Phrases

UNIT V WRITING JOB APPLICATIONS 6

Theory:
Reading: Reading a Job Interview, SOP, Company Profile and Completing Comprehension Exercises
– Writing: Job Applications and Resumes And Sops-Grammar: Present Perfect and Continuous
Tenses.

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:

 Read and comprehend technical texts effortlessly.

 Write technical reports and job application for internship or placement.
 Learn to use language effectively in a professional context.

Assessment Pattern
 Two written internal assessments to test learner’s progress in grammar, reading and writing
skills.
 End Semester exam to be tested in two parts: Theory exam for three hours and listening and
speaking skills along with vocabulary for two hours.
MA5252 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II L T P C
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes in 3 1 0 4
II Semester)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To acquaint the students with the concepts of vector calculus which naturally arises in many
engineering problems.
 To develop an understanding of the standard techniques of complex variable theory in
particular analytic function and its mapping property.
 To familiarize the students with complex integration techniques and contour integration
techniques which can be used in real integrals.
 To acquaint the students with Differential Equations which are significantly used in
Engineering problems.
 To make the students appreciate the purpose of using transforms to create a new domain in
which it is easier to handle the problem that is being investigated.

UNIT I VECTOR CALCULUS 12

Gradient and directional derivative – Divergence and Curl – Irrotational and Solenoidal vector fields
– Line integral over a plane curve – Surface integral - Area of a curved surface - Volume integral -
Green’s theorem, Stoke’s theorem and Gauss divergence theorem – Verification and application in
evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.

UNIT II ANALYTIC FUNCTION 12

Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity - Properties – Harmonic
conjugates – Construction of analytic function - Conformal mapping – Mapping by functions -
Bilinear transformation w  c  z, az, 1 / z, z .
2

UNIT III COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12

Line integral - Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series
– Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for evaluation of real
integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour with no pole on real axis.

UNIT IV DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Method of variation of parameters – Method of undetermined coefficients – Homogenous equations
of Euler’s and Legendre’s type – System of simultaneous linear differential equations with constant
coefficients.

UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 12

Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of unit step function and unit
impulse function – Basic properties – Shifting theorems – Transforms of derivatives and integrals –
Initial and Final Value Theorems – Inverse Transforms – Convolution Theorem – Transform of
periodic functions – Application to solution of linear ordinary differential equations with constant
coefficients.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
 Calculate grad, div and curl and use Gauss, Stokes and Greens theorems to simplify
calculations of integrals.
 Construct analytic functions and use their conformal mapping property in application
problems.
 Evaluate real and complex integrals using the Cauchy’s integral formula and residue
theorem.
 Apply various methods of solving differential equation which arise in many application
problems.
 Apply Laplace transform methods for solving linear differential equations.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons, 10th
Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, 44th Edition, New
Delhi, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall Media
(An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), 7th Edition, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, 4th
Edition, New Delhi, 2011.
3. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa
Publications, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2017.
4. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd,
7th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
5. Ramana B.V., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Ltd., 11th
Reprint, New Delhi, 2010.

GE5153 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basics of algorithmic problem solving.
 To develop Python programs with conditionals and loops.
 To define Python functions and use function calls.
 To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries.
 To do input/output with files in Python.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTING AND PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Fundamentals of Computing – Computing Devices – Identification of Computational Problems –
Pseudocodes and Flowcharts – Instructions – Algorithms – Building Blocks of Algorithms –
Introduction to Python Programming – Python Interpreter and Interactive Mode – Variables and
Identifiers – Arithmetic Operators– Values and Types – Statements.

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES:
 Developing Pseudocodes and flowcharts for real life activities such as railway ticket
booking using IRCTC, admission process to undergraduate course, academic schedules
during a semester etc.
 Developing algorithms for basic mathematical expressions using arithmetic operations.
 Installing Python.
 Simple programs on print statements, arithmetic operations.

SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:

 Assignments on pseudocodes and flowcharts.
 Tutorials on Python programs.
UNIT II CONDITIONALS AND FUNCTIONS 9
Operators – Boolean Values – Operator Precedence – Expression – Conditionals: If-Else
Constructs – Loop Structures/Iterative Statements – While Loop – For Loop – Break Statement
– Function Call and Returning Values – Parameter Passing – Local and Global Scope –
Recursive Functions.

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES:
 Simple Python program implementation using Operators, Conditionals, Iterative
Constructs and Functions.
 Implementation of a simple calculator.
 Developing simple applications like calendar, phone directory, to-do lists etc.
 Flow charts for GCD, Exponent Functions, Fibonacci Series using conditionals and
iterative statements.
 External learning - Recursion vs. Iteration.

SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:

 Tutorials on the above activities.
 Group discussion on external learning.

UNIT III SIMPLE DATA STRUCTURES IN PYTHON 10

Introduction to Data Structures – List – Adding Items to a List – Finding and Updating an Item –
Nested Lists – Cloning Lists – Looping Through a List – Sorting a List – List Concatenation –
List Slices – List Methods – List Loop – Mutability – Aliasing – Tuples: Creation, Accessing,
Updating, Deleting Elements in a Tuple, Tuple Assignment, Tuple as Return Value, Nested
Tuples, Basic Tuple Operations – Sets.

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES:
 Implementing python program using lists, tuples, sets for the following scenario:
Simple sorting techniques
Student Examination Report
Billing Scheme during shopping.
 External learning - List vs. Tuple vs. Set – Implementing any application using all the
three data structures.

SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:

 Tutorials on the above activities.
 Group Discussion on external learning component.

UNIT IV STRINGS, DICTIONARIES, MODULES 10

Strings: Introduction, Indexing, Traversing, Concatenating, Appending, Multiplying, Formatting,
Slicing, Comparing, Iterating – Basic Built-In String Functions – Dictionary: Creating, Accessing,
Adding Items, Modifying, Deleting, Sorting, Looping, Nested Dictionaries Built-in Dictionary
Function – Finding Key and Value in a Dictionary – Modules – Module Loading and Execution –
Packages – Python Standard Libraries.

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES:
 Implementing Python program by importing Time module, Math package etc.
 Creation of any package (student’s choice) and importing into the application.
SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:
 Tutorials on the above activities.

UNIT V FILE HANDLING AND EXCEPTION HANDLING 7

Introduction to Files – File Path – Opening and Closing Files – Reading and Writing Files – File
Position – Exception: Errors and Exceptions, Exception Handling, Multiple Exceptions.

SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES:
 Developing modules using Python to handle files and apply various operations on files.
 Usage of exceptions, multiple except blocks - for applications that use delimiters like
age, range of numerals etc.
 Implementing Python program to open a non-existent file using exceptions.

SUGGESTED EVALUATION METHODS:

 Tutorials on the above activities.
 Case Studies.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems.
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Write simple Python programs for solving problems.
CO4: Decompose a Python program into functions.
CO5: Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries etc.
CO6: Read and write data from/to files in Python programs.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1    
CO2    
CO3    
CO4      
CO5          
CO6            

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reema Thareja, “Python Programming: Using Problem Solving Approach”, Oxford
University Press, 2017.
2. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist”, Second
Edition, Shroff/O‘Reilly Publishers, 2016.
(http://greenteapress.com/wp/thinkpython/).

REFERENCES:
1. Guido van Rossum, Fred L. Drake Jr., “An Introduction to Python – Revised and
Updated for Python 3.2”, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.
2. John V Guttag, “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python”, Revised
and Expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013
3. Charles Dierbach, “Introduction to Computer Science using Python”, Wiley India Edition,
2016.
4. Timothy A. Budd, “Exploring Python”, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd., 2015.
5. Kenneth A. Lambert, “Fundamentals of Python: First Programs”, Cengage Learning,
2012.
EE5251 BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic concepts of electric circuits, magnetic circuits and wiring.
 To understand the operation of AC and DC machines.
 To understand the working principle of electronic devices and circuits.

UNIT I BASIC CIRCUITS AND DOMESTIC WIRING 9

Electrical circuit elements (R, L and C)-Dependent and independent sources – Ohm’s Law-
Kirchhoff’s laws - mesh current and node voltage methods (Analysis with only independent
source) - Phasors – RMS-Average values-sinusoidal steady state response of simple RLC
circuits. Types of wiring- Domestic wiring - Specification of Wires-Earthing-Methods-Protective
devices.

UNIT II THREE PHASE CIRCUITS AND MAGNETIC CIRCUITS 9

Three phase supply – Star connection – Delta connection –Balanced and Unbalanced Loads-
Power in three-phase systems – Comparison of star and delta connections – Advantages-
Magnetic circuits-Definitions-MMF, Flux, Reluctance, Magnetic field intensity, Flux density,
Fringing, self and mutual inductances-simple problems.

UNIT III ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9

Working principle of DC generator, motor-EMF and Torque equation-Types –Shunt, Series and
Compound-Applications. Working principle of transformer-EMF equation-Operating principles of
three phase and single phase induction motor-Applications. Working principles of alternator-
EMF equation-Operating principles of Synchronous motor, stepper motor-Applications.

UNIT IV BASICS OF ELECTRONICS 9

Intrinsic semiconductors, Extrinsic semiconductors – P-type and N-type, P-N junction, VI
Characteristics of PN junction diode, Zener effect, Zener diode, Zener diode Characteristics-
Rectifier circuits-Wave shaping.

UNIT V CURRENT CONTROLLED AND VOLTAGE CONTROLLED DEVICES 9

Working principle and characteristics - BJT, SCR, JFET, MOSFET.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 To be able to understand the concepts related with electrical circuits and wiring.
CO2 To be able to study the different three phase connections and the concepts of magnetic
circuits.
CO3 Capable of understanding the operating principle of AC and DC machines.
CO4 To be able to understand the working principle of electronic devices such as diode and
zener diode.
CO 5 To be able to understand the characteristics and working of current controlled and
voltage controlled devices.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1     
CO2      
CO3       
CO4       
CO5      
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kothari DP and I.J Nagrath, “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, McGraw Hill
Education, 2014
2. Del Toro, “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Second edition, Pearson Education,
New Delhi, 1989.
3. John Bird, “Electrical Circuit theory and technology”, Routledge; 5th edition, 2013

REFERENCES:
1. Thomas L. Floyd, ‘Electronic Devices’, 10th Edition, Pearson Education, 2018.
2. Albert Malvino, David Bates, ‘Electronic Principles, McGraw Hill Education; 7th edition,
2017
3 Kothari DP and I.J Nagrath, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 2010.
4 Muhammad H.Rashid, “Spice for Circuits and electronics”, 4th ed., Cengage India,2019.

GE5152 ENGINEERING MECHANICS L T P C

3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. Applying the various methods to determine the resultant forces and its equilibrium acting
on a particle in 2D and 3D.
2. Applying the concept of reaction forces (non-concurrent coplanar and noncoplanar
forces) and moment of various support systems with rigid bodies in 2D and 3D in
equilibrium. Reducing the force, moment, and couple to an equivalent force - couple
system acting on rigid bodies in 2D and 3D.
3. Applying the concepts of locating centroids/center of gravity of various sections /
volumes and to find out area moments of inertia for the sections and mass moment of
inertia of solids.
4. Applying the concepts of frictional forces at the contact surfaces of various engineering
systems.
5. Applying the various methods of evaluating kinetic and kinematic parameters of the rigid
bodies subjected to concurrent coplanar forces.

UNIT I STATICS OF PARTICLES (9+3)

Fundamental Concepts and Principles, Systems of Units, Method of Problem Solutions, Statics
of Particles -Forces in a Plane, Resultant of Forces, Resolution of a Force into Components,
Rectangular Components of a Force, Unit Vectors. Equilibrium of a Particle- Newton’s First Law
of Motion, Space and Free-Body Diagrams, Forces in Space, Equilibrium of a Particle in Space.

UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES (9+3)

Principle of Transmissibility, Equivalent Forces, Vector Product of Two Vectors, Moment of a
Force about a Point, Varignon’s Theorem, Rectangular Components of the Moment of a Force,
Scalar Product of Two Vectors, Mixed Triple Product of Three Vectors, Moment of a Force about
an Axis, Couple - Moment of a Couple, Equivalent Couples, Addition of Couples, Resolution of a
Given Force into a Force -Couple system, Further Reduction of a System of Forces, Equilibrium
in Two and Three Dimensions - Reactions at Supports and Connections.

UNIT III DISTRIBUTED FORCES (9+3)

Centroids of lines and areas – symmetrical and unsymmetrical shapes, Determination of
Centroids by Integration , Theorems of Pappus-Guldinus, Distributed Loads on Beams, Centre
of Gravity of a Three-Dimensional Body, Centroid of a Volume, Composite Bodies ,
Determination of Centroids of Volumes by Integration.
Moments of Inertia of Areas and Mass - Determination of the Moment of Inertia of an Area by
Integration , Polar Moment of Inertia , Radius of Gyration of an Area , Parallel-Axis Theorem ,
Moments of Inertia of Composite Areas, Moments of Inertia of a Mass - Moments of Inertia of
Thin Plates, Determination of the Moment of Inertia of a Three-Dimensional Body by Integration

UNIT IV FRICTION (9+3)

The Laws of Dry Friction. Coefficients of Friction, Angles of Friction, Wedges, Wheel Friction.
Rolling Resistance, Ladder friction.

UNITV DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES (9+3)

Kinematics - Rectilinear Motion and Curvilinear Motion of Particles. Kinetics- Newton’s Second
Law of Motion -Equations of Motions, Dynamic Equilibrium, Energy and Momentum Methods -
Work of a Force , Kinetic Energy of a Particle, Principle of Work and Energy, Principle of
Impulse and Momentum, Impact, Method of Virtual Work - Work of a Force, Potential Energy,
Potential Energy and Equilibrium.
TOTAL (L: 45 + T: 15)=60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Apply the various methods to determine the resultant forces and its equilibrium acting on
a particle in 2D and 3D.
2. Apply the concept of reaction forces (non-concurrent coplanar and noncoplanar forces)
and moment of various support systems with rigid bodies in 2D and 3D in equilibrium.
Reducing the force, moment, and couple to an equivalent force - couple system acting
on rigid bodies in 2D and 3D.
3. Apply the concepts of locating centroids / center of gravity of various sections / volumes
and to find out area moments of inertia for the sections and mass moment of inertia of
solids.
4. Apply the concepts of frictional forces at the contact surfaces of various engineering
systems.
5. Apply the various methods of evaluating kinetic and kinematic parameters of the rigid
bodies subjected to concurrent coplanar forces.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Beer Ferdinand P, Russel Johnston Jr., David F Mazurek, Philip J Cornwell,
SanjeevSanghi, Vector Mechanics for Engineers: Statics and Dynamics, McGraw
Higher Education., 11thEdition, 2017.
2. Vela Murali, “Engineering Mechanics-Statics and Dynamics”, Oxford University Press,
2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Boresi P and Schmidt J, Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics, 1/e, Cengage
learning, 2008.
2. Hibbeller, R.C., Engineering Mechanics: Statics, and Engineering Mechanics: Dynamics,
13th edition, Prentice Hall, 2013.
3. Irving H. Shames, Krishna Mohana Rao G, Engineering Mechanics – Statics and
Dynamics, 4thEdition, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2005.
4. Meriam J L and Kraige L G, Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Engineering Mechanics:
Dynamics, 7th edition, Wiley student edition, 2013.
5. Timoshenko S, Young D H, Rao J V and Sukumar Pati, Engineering Mechanics,
5thEdition, McGraw Hill Higher Education, 2013.
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 0.9 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.9 0.3 0.3
2 0.9 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.9 0.3 0.3
3 0.9 0.6 0.9 0.3 0.6 0.9 0.3 0.6
4 0.9 0.6 0.9 0.3 0.6 0.9 0.3 0.6
5 0.9 0.6 0.9 0.3 0.6 0.9 0.3 0.6
PH5251 MATERIALS SCIENCE L T P C
(Common to Mechanical, Manufacturing, Industrial, Mining, 3 0 0 3
Aeronautical, Automobile and Production Engineering & Rubber and Plastics Technology)

COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To make the students to understand the basics of crystallography and crystal
imperfections.
 To introduce various strengthening methods of materials, and also various mechanical
properties and their measurement.
 To impart knowledge on the basics of phase diagrams and their applications.
 To learn about iron-carbon system, and about various ferrous and non-ferrous alloys.
 To introduce the preparation, properties and applications of ceramics, composites and
nanomaterials.

UNIT I CRYSTALLOGRAPHY 9
Crystallographic directions and planes – metallic crystal structures: BCC, FCC and HCP – linear
and planar densities – crystal imperfections- edge and screw dislocations, Burgers vector and
elastic strain energy- surface imperfections – grain and twin boundaries – Polymorphism –
phase changes – nucleation and growth – homogeneous and heterogeneous nucleation.

UNIT II MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9

Tensile test - plastic deformation by slip – slip systems – mechanisms of strengthening in
metals: strain hardening, grain size reduction, solid solution strengthening, precipitation
hardening – Creep: creep curves, stress and temperature effects, mechanisms of creep, creep-
resistant materials – Fracture: ductile and brittle fractures - the Griffith criterion – fracture
toughness - Fatigue failure: the S-N curve – factors that affect fatigue life – Hardness: Rockwell
and Brinell hardness tests, Knoop and Vickers microhardness tests.

UNIT III PHASE DIAGRAMS 9

Basic concepts - Gibbs phase rule – Unary phase diagram (iron) - Binary phase diagrams:
isomorphous systems (Cu-Ni) – determination of phase composition and phase amounts – tie
line and lever rule - binary eutectic diagram with no solid solution and limited solid solution (Pb-
Sn) – eutectoid and peritectic reactions - other invariant reactions – micro structural
development during the slow cooling: eutectic, hypereutectic and hypoeutectic compositions.

UNIT IV FERROUS AND NONFERROUS ALLOYS 9

The Fe-Fe3C phase diagram: phases, invariant reactions, development of microstructure in
eutectoid, hypoeutectoid and hypereutectoid alloys – influence of other alloying elements in the
Fe-C system - phase transformations – isothermal transformation diagram for eutectoid iron-
carbon alloy – microstructures: pearlite, bainite, spheroidite and martensite – steels, stainless
steels and cast irons – copper alloys – aluminum alloys – titanium alloys.

UNIT V CERAMICS, COMPOSITES AND NANO MATERIALS 9

Ceramics – types and applications- refractories, abrasives and cements – Composites:
classification, role of matrix and reinforcement - Fiber reinforced composites – carbon-carbon
composites – Nanomaterials: types, physical, chemical and mechanical properties - carbon
nanotubes: properties and applications - synthesis of nanomaterials: sonochemical, molecular
epitaxy, physical vapor deposition (PVD) and chemical vapor deposition (CVD).
Characterization: Transmission electron microscopy - scanning electron microscopy - Atomic
force microscopy - X-ray powder diffraction - Nanoparticle size calculation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the students will
 understand the basics of crystallography and its importance in materials properties
  understand the significance of dislocations, strengthening mechanisms, and tensile, creep,
hardness and fracture behavior of materials
 gain knowledge on binary phase diagrams, and also will be able to determine the phase
composition and phase amount.
 understand about the Fe-C system and various microstructures in it, and also about
various ferrous and non-ferrous alloys.
 get adequate understanding on the preparation, properties and applications of ceramics,
composites and nanomaterials.

REFERENCES
1. W.D.Callitser and D.G.Rethwish. Materials Science and Engineering. John Wiley & Sons,
2014.
2. V.Raghavan. Materials Science and Engineering: A First Course. PHI Learning, 2015.
3. M.F.Ashby, P.J.Ferreira and D.L.Schodek. Nanomaterials, Nanotechnologies and Design:
An Introduction for Engineers, 2011.
4. J.F.Shackelford. Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers. Pearson, 2015.
5. D.R. Askeland and W.J.Wright. Essentials of Materials Science and Engineering, Cengage
Learning, 2013.
6. W.F.Smith, J.Hashemi and R.Prakash. Materials Science and Engineering. McGraw Hill
Education, 2017.

GE5252 தமிழரும் மதொழில் நுட்பமும் L T P C

1 0 0 1

அலகு I மநசவு மற் றும் பொறனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

ெங் க கொலத்தில் தநெவுத் ததொழில் – பொமனத் ததொழில் நுட்பம் - கருப் பு சிவப் பு
பொண்டங் கள் – பொண்டங் களில் கீறல் குறியீடுகள் .

அலகு II வடிவறமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டிடத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

ெங் க கொலத்தில் வடிவமமப் பு மற் றும் கட்டுமொனங் கள் & ெங் க கொலத்தில் வீட்டுப்
தபொருட்களில் வடிவமமப் பு- ெங் க கொலத்தில் கட்டுமொன தபொருட்களும் நடுகல் லும்
– சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் மமமட அமமப்பு பற் றிய விவரங் கள் - மொமல் லபுரெ்
சிற் பங் களும் , மகொவில் களும் – மெொழர் கொலத்துப் தபருங் மகொயில் கள் மற் றும் பிற
வழிபொட்டுத் தலங் கள் – நொயக்கர் கொலக் மகொயில் கள் - மொதிரி கட்டமமப் புகள்
பற் றி அறிதல் , மதுமர மீனொட்சி அம் மன் ஆலயம் மற் றும் திருமமல நொயக்கர்
மஹொல் – தெட்டிநொட்டு வீடுகள் – பிரிட்டிஷ் கொலத்தில் தென்மனயில் இந்மதொ-
ெொமரொதெனிக் கட்டிடக் கமல.

அலகு III உற் பத்தித் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

கப் பல் கட்டும் கமல – உமலொகவியல் – இரும் புத் ததொழிற் ெொமல – இரும் மப
உருக்குதல் , எஃகு – வரலொற் றுெ் ெொன்றுகளொக தெம் பு மற் றும் தங் க நொணயங் கள் –
நொணயங் கள் அெ்ெடித்தல் – மணி உருவொக்கும் ததொழிற் ெொமலகள் – கல் மணிகள் ,
கண்ணொடி மணிகள் – சுடுமண் மணிகள் – ெங் கு மணிகள் – எலும் புத்துண்டுகள் –
ததொல் லியல் ெொன்றுகள் – சிலப் பதிகொரத்தில் மணிகளின் வமககள் .

அலகு IV கவளொை்றம மற் றும் நீ ர்ப்பொசனத் மதொழில் நுட்பம் : 3

அமண, ஏரி, குளங் கள் , மதகு – மெொழர்கொலக் குமுழித் தூம் பின் முக்கியத்துவம் –
கொல் நமட பரொமரிப் பு – கொல் நமடகளுக்கொக வடிவமமக்கப் பட்ட கிணறுகள் –
மவளொண்மம மற் றும் மவளொண்மமெ் ெொர்ந்த தெயல் பொடுகள் – கடல் ெொர் அறிவு –
மீன்வளம் – முத்து மற் றும் முத்துக்குளித்தல் – தபருங் கடல் குறித்த பண்மடய
அறிவு – அறிவுெொர் ெமூகம் .

அலகு V அறிவியல் தமிழ் மற் றும் கைித்தமிழ் : 3

அறிவியல் தமிழின் வளர்ெ்சி –கணித்தமிழ் வளர்ெ்சி - தமிழ் நூல் கமள மின்பதிப் பு
தெய் தல் – தமிழ் தமன்தபொருட்கள் உருவொக்கம் – தமிழ் இமணயக் கல் விக்கழகம் –
தமிழ் மின் நூலகம் – இமணயத்தில் தமிழ் அகரொதிகள் – தெொற் குமவத் திட்டம் .
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும்
கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay) (Published
by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book
and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.

GE5252 TAMILS AND TECHNOLOGY L T P C

1 0 0 1
UNIT I WEAVING AND CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY 3
Weaving Industry during Sangam Age – Ceramic technology – Black and Red Ware Potteries
(BRW) – Graffiti on Potteries.

UNIT II DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY 3

Designing and Structural construction House & Designs in household materials during Sangam Age
- Building materials and Hero stones of Sangam age – Details of Stage Constructions in
Silappathikaram - Sculptures and Temples of Mamallapuram - Great Temples of Cholas and other
worship places - Temples of Nayaka Period - Type study (Madurai Meenakshi Temple)- Thirumalai
Nayakar Mahal - Chetti Nadu Houses, Indo - Saracenic architecture at Madras during British Period.

UNIT III MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY 3

Art of Ship Building - Metallurgical studies - Iron industry - Iron smelting, steel -Copper and gold-
Coins as source of history - Minting of Coins – Beads making-industries Stone beads -Glass beads
- Terracotta beads -Shell beads/ bone beats - Archeological evidences - Gem stone types
described in Silappathikaram.
UNIT IV AGRICULTURE AND IRRIGATION TECHNOLOGY 3
Dam, Tank, ponds, Sluice, Significance of Kumizhi Thoompu of Chola Period, Animal Husbandry -
Wells designed for cattle use - Agriculture and Agro Processing - Knowledge of Sea - Fisheries –
Pearl - Conche diving - Ancient Knowledge of Ocean - Knowledge Specific Society.

UNIT V SCIENTIFIC TAMIL & TAMIL COMPUTING 3

Development of Scientific Tamil - Tamil computing – Digitalization of Tamil Books – Development of
Tamil Software – Tamil Virtual Academy – Tamil Digital Library – Online Tamil Dictionaries –
Sorkuvai Project.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS

TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. தமிழக வரலொறு – மக்களும் பண்பொடும் – மக.மக. பிள் மள (தவளியீடு:
தமிழ் நொடு பொடநூல் மற் றும்
கல் வியியல் பணிகள் கழகம் ).
2. கணினித் தமிழ் – முமனவர் இல. சுந்தரம் . (விகடன் பிரசுரம் ).
3. கீழடி – மவமக நதிக்கமரயில் ெங் ககொல நகர நொகரிகம் (ததொல் லியல் துமற
தவளியீடு)
4. தபொருமந – ஆற் றங் கமர நொகரிகம் . (ததொல் லியல் துமற தவளியீடு)
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay) (Published
by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book
and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.

GE5161 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T PC

0 0 4 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the problem solving approaches.
 To learn the basic programming constructs in Python.
 To articulate where computing strategies support in providing Python-based solutions to
real world problems.
 To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries.
 To do input/output with files in Python.
EXPERIMENTS:
1. Identification and solving of simple real life or scientific or technical problems, and
developing flow charts for the same.
2. Python programming using simple statements and expressions.
3. Scientific problems using Conditionals and Iterative loops.
4. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Lists, Tuples.
5. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Sets, Dictionaries.
6. Implementing programs using Functions.
7. Implementing programs using Strings.
8. Implementing programs using written modules and Python Standard Libraries.
9. Implementing real-time/technical applications using File handling.
10. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Exception handling.
11. Exploring Pygame tool.
12. Developing a game activity using Pygame like bouncing ball, car race etc.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Structure simple Python programs for solving problems.
CO4: Decompose a Python program into functions.
CO5: Represent compound data using Python data structures.
CO6: Apply Python features in developing software applications.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1    
CO2    
CO3    
CO4      
CO5          
CO6            

EE5261ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To impart hands on experience in verification of circuit laws and measurement of circuit
parameters
2. To train the students in performing various tests on electrical motors.
3. It also gives practical exposure to the usage of CRO, power sources & function
generators

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Verification of Kirchhoff’s Law.
2. Steady state response of AC and DC circuits (Mesh, Node Analysis)
3. Frequency response of RLC circuits.
4. Measurement power in three phase circuits by two-watt meter method.
5. Regulation of single phase transformer.
6. Performance characteristics of DC shunt generator.
7. Performance characteristics of single phase induction motor.
8. Characteristics of PN diode and Zener diode
9. Characteristics of Zener diode
10. Half wave and full wave Rectifiers
11. Application of Zener diode as shunt regulator.
12. Characteristics of BJT and JFET

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. To become familiar with the basic circuit components and know how to connect them to
make a real electrical circuit;
2. Ability to perform speed characteristic of different electrical machines
3. Ability to use logic gates and Flip flops

GE5262 COMMUNICATION LABORATORY LT P C

0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES
 To identify varied group discussion skills and apply them to take part in effective discussions
in a professional context.
 To be able to communicate effectively through writing.

UNIT I 12
Speaking-Role Play Exercises Based on Workplace Contexts, - talking about competition-
discussing progress toward goals-talking about experiences- talking about events in life- discussing
past events-Writing: writing emails ( formal & semi-formal).

UNIT II 12
Speaking: discussing news stories-talking about frequency-talking about travel problems-
discussing travel procedures- talking about travel problems- making arrangements-describing
arrangements-discussing plans and decisions- discussing purposes and reasons- understanding
common technology terms-Writing: - writing different types of emails.

UNIT III 12
Speaking: discussing predictions-describing the climate-discussing forecasts and scenarios- talking
about purchasing-discussing advantages and disadvantages- making comparisons- discussing likes
and dislikes- discussing feelings about experiences-discussing imaginary scenarios Writing: short
essays and reports-formal/semi-formal letters.

UNIT IV 12
Speaking: discussing the natural environment-describing systems-describing position and
movement- explaining rules-(example- discussing rental arrangements)- understanding technical
instructions-Writing: writing instructions-writing a short article.

UNIT V 12
Speaking: describing things relatively-describing clothing-discussing safety issues( making
recommendations) talking about electrical devices-describing controlling actions- Writing: job
application( Cover letter + Curriculum vitae)-writing recommendations.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES
 Speak effectively in group discussions held in a formal/semi formal contexts.
 Write emails and effective job applications.
Assessment Pattern
 One online / app based assessment to test speaking and writing skills
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of speaking and writing.

MA5355 TRANSFORM TECHNIQUES AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL L T PC

EQUATIONS 3 1 0 4

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential
equations that model physical processes;
 To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many applications in engineering
 To develop the analytic solutions for partial differential equations used in engineering by
Fourier series;
 To acquaint the student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of
situations in which the functions used are not periodic;
 To develop Z- transform techniques which will perform the same task for discrete time
systems as Laplace Transform, a valuable aid in analysis of continuous time systems.

UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Formation – Solutions of first order equations – Standard types and Equations reducible to
standard types – Lagrange’s Linear equation – Solution of linear equations of higher order with
constant coefficients – Linear non-homogeneous partial differential equations.

UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 12

Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half-range Sine and
cosine series – Complex form of Fourier series – Parseval’s identity – Harmonic Analysis.

UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION 12

Classification of partial differential equations- Method of separation of variables – Solutions of
one dimensional wave equation and one-dimensional heat equation – Steady state solution of
two-dimensional heat equation – Fourier series solutions in cartesian coordinates.

UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORM 12

Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair - Sine and cosine transforms – Properties –
Transform of elementary functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s identity.

UNIT V Z – TRANSFORM AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 12

Z-transform – Elementary properties – Inverse Z-transform – Convolution theorem – Initial and
final value theorems – Formation of difference equation – Solution of difference equation using
Z - transform.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, students will be able to
 Solve partial differential equations which arise in application problems.
 Analyze the functions as an infinite series involving sine and cosine functions.
 Obtain the solutions of the partial differential equations using Fourier series.
  Obtain Fourier transforms for the functions which are needed for solving application
problems.
 Manipulate discrete data sequences using Z transform techniques.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Erwin kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons,
10th Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, 44th Edition,
New Delhi, 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall Media
(An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), 7th Edition, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education,
4th Edition, New Delhi, 2011.
3. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd,
7th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
4. Ramana, B.V. “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill,
11th Reprint, New Delhi, 2010.

AE5301 AERO ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS

L T PC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
1. To impart basic knowledge on the fundamental concepts of thermodynamics.
2. To apply first and second law of thermodynamics to closed and open systems.
3. To gain basic knowledge on the concept of entropy and the types of energy for closed
and open systems.
4. To 47nalyse and compare the performance of various IC engines.
5. To get exposure on the basic concepts of psychrometry and its relations.

UNIT I FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 9

Concept of continuum – Macroscopic approach-thermodynamic systems-properties-state, path
and process, quasi-static process- work and heat-zeroth law and first law of thermodynamics-
internal energy-enthalpy- applications of first law of thermodynamics to closed and open system.

UNIT II SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 9

Second law of thermodynamics-Kelvin’s and Clausius statements of second law-reversibility and
irreversibility-Carnot theorem-Carnot cycle- reversed Carnot cycle- Clausius inequality-concept
of entropy-principle of energy-availability and unavailability-Exergy for closed and an open
systems.

UNIT III PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCES AND POWER CYCLE 9

Properties of pure substances-Thermodynamic properties of pure substances in solid, liquid and
vapour phases, phase rule, P-V, P-T, T-V, H-S diagrams, PVT surfaces thermodynamics
properties of steam, calculations of work done and heat transfer in non-flow and flow processes.
Standard Rankine cycle, Reheat and Regeneration cycle.
UNIT IV AIR STANDARD CYLCES AND IC ENGINES 9
Cycle-air standard efficiency-Otto cycle-diesel cycle- dual cycle- Brayton cycle-components of IC
engines-Two stroke and four stroke cycle engine-performance of IC engine-supercharging.

UNIT V REFRIGERATION, AIR CONDITIONING AND PSYCHROMETRY 9

Concepts of psychrometry, Psychrometric relation and charts-processes-Refrigeration systems-
Air-conditioning systems and its types- simple vapour compression system-vapour absorption
system-Refrigerants.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Apply different laws and basics of thermodynamic process.
CO2: Classify Types of basic air standard cycles and the working principle of compressor.
CO3: Apply the steam power generation and jet propulsion principles.
CO4: Relate theoretical knowledge with different machines.
CO5: Gain knowledge which is the prerequisite for heat transfer.
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1      
CO2      
CO3      
CO4        
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nag.P.K., “Engineering Thermodynamics”, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited;
5th edition ,April 2013.
2. Rathakrishnan E, “Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics”, Prentice Hall India,
Second revised edition 2005.
3. Yunus A. Cengel and Michael A. Boles, “Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach”
McGraw-Hill Science/Engineering/Math; 7thedition 2010.

REFERENCES:
1. Arora C.P, “Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Holman.J.P., “Thermodynamics”, 3rd Ed. McGraw-Hill, 2007.
3. Merala C, Pother, Craig W, Somerton, “Thermodynamics for Engineers”, Schaum Outline
Series, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
4. Ramalingam K.K. “Thermodynamics”, Sci-Tech Publications, 2006.
5. Venwylen and Sontag, “Classical Thermodynamics”, Wiley Eastern, 1987.
AE5302 SOLID MECHANICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
1. To enable understanding of the behaviour and response of materials.
2. To allow the student to carry out easy and moderate level structural analysis of basic
structural members.
3. To familiarise with the different methods used for beam deflection analysis.
4. To impart knowledge to the students on how structural elements are sized.
5. To enable the student to gain knowledge in how stresses are developed and distributed
internally.

UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS & AXIAL LOADING 9

Normal Stress and Strain – Mechanical Properties of Materials – Material Constants – Study of
Stress-strain Curves of Different Materials – Elasticity & Plasticity – Hooke’s Law – Shear Stress
and Strain – Allowable Stresses and Allowable Loads – Design for Axial Loads – Impact Loading
– Thermal Stresses in Bars – Strain Energy in a Bar – Tapered Bar Subject to Axial Load.

UNIT II STRESSES IN BEAMS 9

Types of Beams, Loads, and Support Reactions – Relationships Between Load, Shear Force, and
Bending Moments – Shear-Force and Bending-Moment Diagrams – Curvature of a Beam –
Normal Stresses in Beams - Design of Beams for Bending Stress – Shear Stresses in Beams of
Rectangular & Circular Cross Sections – The I-Section Beam – Built-up Beams – Application
Problems.
UNIT III DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 9
The Euler-Bernoulli Beam Theory – Differential Equation of the Deflection Curve – Deflections by
Integration of the Bending-Moment Equation – Deflections by Integration of the Shear-Force and
Load Equations – Method of Superposition – Moment-Area Theorems and Application –
Macaulay’s Method – Strain Energy in Beams – Non-Prismatic Beams.

UNIT IV TORSION 9
Torsional Deformations of Circular Bars of Linearly Elastic Materials – Non-uniform Torsion –
Stresses and Strains in Pure Shear – Angle of Twist & Torsional Rigidity – Transmission of Power
by Circular Shafts – Statically Indeterminate Torsional Members – Stress Analysis of a Close-Coil
Helical Spring – Stress Concentration in Torsion – Shaft Design Principle.

UNIT V BASIC CONCEPTS IN APPLIED STRESS ANALYSIS 9

Plane Stress – Principal Stresses and Maximum Shear Stresses – Mohr’s Circle for Plane Stress
– Hooke’s Law for Plane Stress – Triaxial Stress – Spherical Pressure Vessels – Cylindrical
Pressure Vessels –Maximum Stresses in Beams – Stress Concentration in Bending – Combined
Loadings – Sketch of Stress Elements – Stresses in Inclined Planes & Transformation Equations.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Clear understanding of mechanical behaviour of materials.
CO2: Knowledge of different structural members and load types.
CO3: Design members under axial loading.
CO4: Design member under torsion loading.
CO5: Calculate beams deflections.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1      
CO2      
CO3      
CO4      
CO5      

TEXT BOOKS:
1. James M. Gere, “Mechanics of Materials”, 8th Edition, 2013.

REFERENCES:
1. David Roylance ,'Mechanics of Materials,Wiley; 1st edition,1995
2. Hibbeler R.C,'Mechanics of Materials', 10th Edition, Pearson College Div, 2016
3. Rajput R.K, 'Strength of Materials', S.Chand Ltd, 4th Edition, 2006.

AE5351 FLUID MECHANICS AND FLUID MACHINES

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
1. To learn about the basic properties of fluids.
2. To introduce the concept of incompressible and viscous flows.
3. To have a thorough knowledge on dimensional analysis and model studies.
4. To study the applications of conservation laws to flow through pipes and hydraulic
machines.
5. To learn the basics of water turbines, their classification and working principles.

UNIT I BASIC EQUATIONS 9

Definition of fluid, Newton’s law of viscosity, Units and dimensions-Properties of fluids, mass
density, specific volume, specific gravity, viscosity, compressibility and surface tension, Control
volume- application of continuity equation and momentum equation, Incompressible flow,
Bernoulli’s equation and its applications.

UNIT II INCOMPRESSIBLE VISCOUS FLOW 9

Exact flow solutions in channels and ducts, Couette and Poisuielle flow, laminar flow through
circular conduits and circular annuli- concept of boundary layer – measures of boundary layer
thickness – Darcy Weisbach equation, friction factor, Moody’s diagram.

UNIT III DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS AND MODEL STUDIES 9

Need for dimensional analysis–methods of dimension analysis–Similitude–types of similitude
Dimensionless parameters–application of dimensionless parameters–Model analysis.

UNIT IV PUMPS 9
Euler’s equation – Theory of Roto dynamic machines – various efficiencies – velocity components
at entry and exit of the rotor, velocity triangles – Centrifugal pumps, working principle, work done
by the impeller, performance curves – Cavitation in pumps- Reciprocating pump–working principle.

UNIT V TURBINES 9
Classification of water turbines, heads and efficiencies, velocity triangles- Axial, radial and mixed
flow turbines- Pelton wheel, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbines, working principles – draft tube
Specific speed, unit quantities, performance curves for turbines – governing of turbines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Exhibit the basic understanding on fluid properties and fluid statics.
CO2: Demonstrate the understanding in fluid kinematics and governing equations.
CO3: Use the governing equations for fluid flow problems and understand the elementary
plane flows.
CO4: Analyse laminar and turbulent flow problems.
CO5: Acquire knowledge on the various types of fluid machines.
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1      
CO2      
CO3       
CO4        
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ojha C.S.P, Berndtsson R and Chadramouli P. N., Oxford University Press, 2010
2. Rathakrishnan. E, Fluid Mechanics, Prentice Hall of India,2nd Edition, 2007
3. Subramanya K,' Theory and Applications of Fluid Mechanics',Tata McGraw Hill,1993.
4. Yunus A.Cengel and John M.Cimbala, Fluid Mechanics, McGraw Hill, 2nd, Edition, 2013.

REFERENCES:
1. Bansal, R.K., Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics Machines, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., New
Delhi, 9th edition,2015.
2. Kumar. K.L. Engineering Fluid Mechanics (VII Ed.) S Chand publishers 2006 edition Reprint
Edition (1 December 2010).
3. Ramamurtham. S, Hydraulics, Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines, Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Co Pvt., Ltd, 9th edition, 2012.

AE5303 ELEMENTS OF AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
1. To introduce the concepts of flying.
2. To impart knowledge about the different layers in International standard atmosphere.
3. To provide important design principles of airplane structures.
4. To describe about various systems and instruments used in airplanes.
5. To provide adequate knowledge on the control systems and navigational instruments
used on airplanes.

UNIT I BASICS OF AERONAUTICS 9

History of flight – Classification of flight vehicles-Components of an airplane and their functions-
lift generation – airfoil nomenclature – International Standard Atmosphere- Types and working
principles of aircraft engines.
UNIT II BASICS OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES 9
General types of aircraft construction, Monocoque, semi-monocoque and geodesic
constructions, typical wing and fuselage structure. Use of Aluminium alloy, titanium, stainless
steel and composite materials.

UNIT III AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS 9

Hydraulic systems – Study of typical systems – components – Hydraulic systems controllers –
Modes of operation – Pneumatic systems – Working principles – Typical Pneumatic Power
system – Brake system – Components, Landing Gear Systems – Classification – Shock
absorbers – Retractive mechanism.

UNIT IV AIRCRAFT CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Conventional Systems – Power assisted and fully powered flight controls – Power actuated
systems – Engine control systems – Push pull rod system – operating principles – Modern
control systems – Digital fly by wire systems – Auto pilot system, Active Control Technology.

UNIT V AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTS 9

Flight Instruments and Navigation Instruments – Accelerometers, Air speed Indicators – Mach
Meters – Altimeters - Gyroscopic Instruments– Principles and operation – Study of various types
of engine instruments – Tachometers – Temperature and Pressure gauges.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1 Determine the properties of atmosphere at a given altitude in ISA.
CO2 Demonstrate different types of construction and materials used for aircraft structures.
CO3 Explain the operating principle of various systems used on airplanes.
CO4 Differentiate power assisted and power operated flight control systems.
CO5 Explain the working of various instruments used for aircraft navigation.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1      
CO2        
CO3      
CO4      
CO5      

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anderson, J.D., Introduction to Flight, McGraw-Hill; 8th edition , 2015
2. Handbooks of Airframe and Power plant Mechanics, US dept. of Transportation, Federal,
Aviation Administration, the English Book Store, New Delhi, 1995.
3. Mekinley, J.L. and R.D. Bent, Aircraft Power Plants, McGraw Hill 1993.
4. Pallet, E.H.J. Aircraft Instruments & Principles, Pitman & Co 1993.
5 Stephen.A. Brandt, Introduction to aeronautics: A design perspective, 2nd edition, AIAA
Education Series, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Kermode, A.C. Flight without Formulae, Pearson Education; 11th edition, 2011.
2. McKinley, J.L. and Bent R.D. Aircraft Maintenance & Repair, McGraw Hill, 1993.
AE5311 THERMODYNAMICS AND STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORATORY
L T PC
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
This laboratory course will enable the students
1 To have a practical exposure to the subject of thermodynamics principles.
2 To conduct experiments to find the effectiveness of parallel flow and counter flow heat
exchangers.
3 To test the flash point and fire point of oil.
4 To have hands-on experience on various experiments related to solid mechanics
5 To test and quantify the mechanical properties of Engineering Materials.

Thermodynamics Laboratory:
1. Determination of calorific value of a given fuel.
2. Free convective heat transfer from a flat plate
3. Determination of Effectiveness of parallel flow heat exchangers.
4. Forced convective heat transfer from a flat plate.
5. Determination of Effectiveness of a counter flow heat exchanger
6. Determination of Flash point and Fire point of the given oil.

Strength of Materials Laboratory:

1. Tension Test
2. Testing of springs
3. Impact test, Charpy mode
4. Deflection of Beams
5. Tensile testing of polymers.
6. Fatigue test for Elastomers
Any 10 experiments will be conducted from above 12 experiments
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1 Test and quantify the mechanical properties of Engineering Materials.
CO2 Acquire knowledge on bending properties of beams.
CO3 Estimate the performance of heat exchangers.
Apply principles of convective heat transfer characteristics to practical systems.
CO4
Acquire Knowledge on ignition aspects of fuels and thermal properties of fuels.
CO5
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1       
CO2        
CO3        
CO4        
CO5        
AE5312 FLUID MECHANICS LABORATORY
LTPC
0 021
COURSE OBJECTIVES: This laboratory course will enable the students
1. To have practical exposure on pressure measuring instruments
2. To learn about the practical application of Bernoulli’s theorem
3. To have a practical knowledge about the Venturimeter and its applications
4. To learn practically about the laminar flow characteristics
5. To have a hands on experience on the determination of various performance
parameters of a centrifugal pump
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of Pressure Measuring Devices
2. Stability of Floating Body
3. Hydrostatics Force on Flat Surfaces/Curved Surfaces
4. Verification of Bernoulli’s Theorem
5. Venturimeter Characteristics
6. Orifice meter Characteristics
7. Impacts of jets on solid surfaces
8. Velocity distribution in pipes
9. Laminar Flow Characteristics
10. Measurement of Coefficient of Discharge of given Orifice and Venturi meters
11. Determination of the density & viscosity of an oil and friction factor of oil flow in a pipe
12. Determination of the performance characteristics of a centrifugal pump
Any 10 experiments will be conducted from above 12 experiments
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Explain and apply the basic principles of buoyancy.
CO2: Determine discharge characteristics of flow meters.
CO3: Acquire knowledge on the impact characteristics of jets.
CO4: Measure physical properties of fluids and characterize the performance of fluid
machinery.
CO5: Distinguish between laminar and turbulent flows.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO1 PO1
0 1 2
CO1       
CO2        
CO3         
CO4         
CO5         
GE5361 PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT LTPC
0 021
OBJECTIVES:
 To be proficient in important Microsoft Office tools: MS WORD, EXCEL, POWERPOINT.
 To be proficient in using MS WORD to create quality technical documents, by using
standard templates, widely acceptable styles and formats, variety of features to enhance
the presentability and overall utility value of content.
 To be proficient in using MS EXCEL for all data manipulation tasks including the
common statistical, logical, mathematical etc., operations, conversion, analytics, search
and explore, visualize,interlink, and utilizing many more critical features offered
 To be able to create and share quality presentations by using the features of MS
PowerPoint, including: organization of content, presentability, aesthetics, using media
elements and enhance the overall quality of presentations.

MS WORD: 10 Hours
Create and format a document
Working with tables
Working with Bullets and Lists
Working with styles, shapes, smart art, charts
Inserting objects, charts and importing objects from other office tools
Creating and Using document templates
Inserting equations, symbols and special characters
Working with Table of contents and References, citations
Insert and review comments
Create bookmarks, hyperlinks, endnotes footnote
Viewing document in different modes
Working with document protection and security
Inspect document for accessibility
MS EXCEL: 10 Hours
Create worksheets, insert and format data
Work with different types of data: text, currency, date, numeric etc.
Split, validate, consolidate, Convert data
Sort and filter data
Perform calculations and use functions: (Statistical, Logical, Mathematical, date, Time etc.,)
Work with Lookup and reference formulae
Create and Work with different types of charts
Use pivot tables to summarize and analyse data
Perform data analysis using own formulae and functions
Combine data from multiple worksheets using own formulae and built-in functions to generate results
Export data and sheets to other file formats
Working with macros
Protecting data and Securing the workbook
MS POWERPOINT: 10 Hours
Select slide templates, layout and themes
Formatting slide content and using bullets and numbering
Insert and format images, smart art, tables, charts
Using Slide master, notes and handout master
Working with animation and transitions
Organize and Group slides
Import or create and use media objects: audio, video, animation
Perform slideshow recording and Record narration and create presentable videos
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion the students will be able to
 Use MS Word to create quality documents, by structuring and organizing content for their day
to day technical and academic requirements
 Use MS EXCEL to perform data operations and analytics, record, retrieve data as per
requirements and visualize data for ease of understanding
 Use MS PowerPoint to create high quality academic presentations by including common
tables, charts, graphs, interlinking other elements, and using media objects.

GE5251 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and
emphasize on the biodiversity of India and its conservation.
 To impart knowledge on the causes, effects and control or prevention measures of
environmental pollution and natural disasters.
 To facilitate the understanding of global and Indian scenario of renewable and non-
renewable resources, causes of their degradation and measures to preserve them.
 To familiarize the influence of societal use of resources on the environment and
introduce the legal provisions, National and International laws and conventions for
environmental protection.
 To inculcate the effect of population dynamics on human and environmental health and
inform about human right, value education and role of technology in monitoring human
and environmental issues.

UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 14

Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness - concept of an
ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers
– energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains, food webs and ecological
pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the (a) forest
ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic ecosystems (ponds,
streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic,
species and ecosystem diversity – bio geographical classification of India – value of biodiversity:
consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at
global, national and local levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity –
threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and
endemic species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of
biodiversity. Field study of common plants, insects, birds Field study of simple ecosystems –
pond, river, hill slopes, etc.

UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 8

Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards – soil
waste management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of an
individual in prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management: floods,
earthquake, cyclone and landslides. Field study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial /
Agricultural.
UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 10
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction,
mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and over-
utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and
problems – Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and
using mineral resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused
by agriculture and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water
logging, salinity, case studies – Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non
renewable energy sources, use of alternate energy sources. case studies – Land resources:
Land as a resource, land 47 degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and
desertification – role of an individual in conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of
resources for sustainable lifestyles. Field study of local area to document environmental assets
– river / forest / grassland / hill / mountain.

UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7

From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy – water
conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and rehabilitation of
people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental organization-
environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global warming, acid rain,
ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. – wasteland reclamation –
consumerism and waste products – environment protection act – Air (Prevention and Control of
Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act – Wildlife protection act – Forest
conservation act – enforcement machinery involved in environmental legislation- central and
state pollution control boards- Public awareness.

UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6

Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme
– environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and
child welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
 To recognize and understand the functions of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity
and their conservation.
 To identify the causes, effects and environmental pollution and natural disasters and
contribute to the preventive measures in the immediate society.
 To identify and apply the understanding of renewable and non-renewable resources and
contribute to the sustainable measures to preserve them for future generations.
 To recognize different forms of energy and apply them for suitable applications in for
technological advancement and societal development.
 To demonstrate the knowledge of societal activity on the long and short term
environmental issues and abide by the legal provisions, National and International laws
and conventions in professional and personal activities and to identify and analyse effect
of population dynamics on human value education, consumerism and role of technology
in environmental issues.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anubha Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik’s “Perspectives in Environmental Studies”, 6th Edition,
New Age International Publishers (2018).
2. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
(2016).
3. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education (2004).
REFERENCES:
1. R.K. Trivedi, ‘Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
Standards’, Vol. I and II, Enviro Media.
2. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, ‘Environmental Encyclopedia’, Jaico Publ.,
House, Mumbai, 2001.
3. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT. LTD, New Delhi,
2007.
4. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press
(2005).
5. Erach Bharucha “Textbook of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses” Orient
Blackswan Pvt. Ltd. (2013).

AE5401 LOW SPEED AERODYNAMICS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
1. To learn the concepts of mass, momentum and energy conservation equations relate to
Aerodynamics.
2. To acquire knowledge about the concept of 2-D inviscid flows
3. To learn the methodology of conformal transformation and theory of airfoils.
4. To know the concepts of subsonic wing theory.
5. To learn the basics of viscous flow theory.

UNIT I REVIEW OF BASIC FLUID MECHANICS 9

System and Control volume approach, substantial, local and convective derivative, Continuity,
momentum and energy equations, Inviscid flow, Euler equation, incompressible Bernoulli’s
Equation. Circulation and Vorticity, Green’s Lemma and Stoke’s Theorem, Barotropic Flow,
Kelvin’s theorem, Streamline, Stream Function, Irrotational flow, Potential Function, Equipotential
Lines, Elementary Flows and their combinations.

UNIT II TWO DIMENSIONAL INVISCID INCOMPRESSIBLE FLOW 9

Ideal Flow over a circular cylinder, D’Alembert’s Paradox, Magnus effect, Kutta Joukowski’s
Theorem, Starting Vortex, Kutta condition, Real flow over smooth and rough cylinder.

UNIT III AIRFOIL THEORY 9

Cauchy-Riemann relations, Complex Potential, Methodology of Conformal Transformation, Kutta-
Joukowski transformation and its applications, Karman Trefftz Profiles, Thin Airfoil theory and its
applications.

UNIT IV SUBSONIC WING THEORY 9

Vortex Filament, Biot – Savart Law, Bound Vortex and trailing Vortex, Horse Shoe Vortex, Lifting
Line Theory and its limitations.

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO LAMINAR AND TURBULENT FLOW 9

Boundary layer and boundary layer thickness, displacement thickness, momentum thickness,
Energy thickness, Shape parameter, Boundary layer equations for a steady, two dimensional
incompressible flow, Boundary Layer growth over a Flat plate, Critical Reynolds Number, Blasius
solution, Basics of Turbulent flow, Prandtl’s mixing length hypothesis, Free shear layers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Apply the fundamental concepts of mass, momentum, energy conservation equations for
aerodynamic applications.
CO2: Solve the problems related to the concepts of vorticity, irrotational and circulation.
CO3: Acquire knowledge about ideal and real flow over the bluff and slender bodies.
CO4: Gain insights into thin airfoil theory.
CO5: Analyze and determine velocity profiles in the laminar and turbulent boundary layer.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1       
CO2        
CO3        
CO4       
CO5         

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anderson, J.D., Fundamentals of Aerodynamics, McGraw-Hill Education; 5th edition, 2010.
2. Houghton E. L. & Carruthers N. B., “Aerodynamics for Engineering students”, Edward
Arnold Publishers Ltd., London, 1989.

REFERENCES:
1. Clancy, L J., Aerodynamics, Shroff publishers 2006.
2. John J Bertin., Aerodynamics for Engineers, Prentice Hall publishers, 6th edition, 2013.
3. Milne Thomson, L.H., Theoretical Aerodynamics, Macmillan, 1985.

AE5402 ADVANCED SOLID MECHANICS L T PC

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
1. To provide the students an understanding of linear static analysis of determinate and
indeterminate aircraft structural components.
2. To introduce the advanced concepts in the stress analysis of beams.
3. To impart knowledge and enable the student work out a variety of problems in structural
analysis applying energy principles.
4. To impart knowledge on column theory and practical column design.
5. To allow the student to differentiate between various failures theories and appropriately
apply a failure theory in design.

UNIT I BEAM & TRUSS ANALYSIS 9

Built-Up Beams – Composite Beams – Transformed-Section Method – Types of Statically
Indeterminate Beams – Use of The Principle of Superposition – Analysis of Continuous Beams –
Clapeyron’s 3-Moment equation – Plane Frame Analysis – Truss Analysis in 2-D & 3-D.

UNIT II ENERGY METHODS 9

Energy methods – Determination of Strain Energy and Complementary Energy in a Structural
Member – Castigliano’s Theorems – Unit Load Method – Dummy Load Method – Application to
Deflection Problems in Statically Determinate and Statically Indeterminate Systems – Beams,
Trusses, Frames and Rings.

UNIT III BUCKLING OF COLUMNS 9

Buckling and Stability – Columns with Pinned Ends – Columns with Other Support Conditions –
Euler’s Curve – Columns with Eccentric Axial Loads – The Secant Formula for Columns – Elastic
and Inelastic Column Behavior – Inelastic Buckling – Design Formulas for Columns – Ideal
Column Section.

UNIT IV FAILURE ANALYSIS 9

Failure of Ductile and Brittle Materials – Theories of Failure – Maximum Normal Stress &
Maximum Shear Stress Failure Envelopes – Distortion Energy Failure Theory – Octahedral Shear
Stress Failure Theory – Material Fatigue – Introduction to Fatigue Failure and Fracture –
Repeated Loading – The S-N Curve

UNIT V DESIGN OF JOINTS 9

Type of Joints – Bolted Joints – Determination of Stresses & Design of a Bolted Joint for Axial,
Shear, and Combined Loading – Basic Design of a Welded Joint – Strength of Welding – Different
Types of Rivets and Riveted Joints – Loading on a Riveted Joint – Failure Modes – Strength and
Efficiency of Joints.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Solve problems in Beam & Frame Analysis.
CO2: Solve problems using Energy Methods.
CO3: Solve problems in column buckling and carry out stability analysis.
CO4: Use appropriate failure theories for structural mechanics problems.
CO5: Design different types of Joint under different loading conditions.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1        
CO2        
CO3        
CO4        
CO5         

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peery, D.J., and Azar, J.J., Aircraft Structures, 2nd edition, McGraw – Hill, N.Y., 1999.
2. R.K. Rajput ‘Strength of Materials’, S.Chand Ltd, 4th, Edition, 2006.

REFERENCES:
01. Bruhn E F, ‘Analysis and Design of Flight Vehicle Structures’, Tri-State Off-set Company,
USA, 1985.
02. Donaldson, B.K., ‘Analysis of Aircraft Structures – An Introduction’ Cambridge University
Press publishers, 2nd edition, 2008.
AE5403 AIR BREATHING PROPULSION
LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
 1. To make the students learn thermodynamics principle of cycles of various jet propulsion
engines and their performance characteristics.
2. To impart knowledge on subsonic and supersonic inlet operating characteristics to
students.
3. To make the students familiarize with the combustion processes in gas turbine engine
and nozzle performance characteristics.
4. To give exposure on various types of air compressor, operating characteristics and
various design parameter of compressor to students.
5. To make the students learn the principle of operation of turbine and turbine design
parameter along with matching of compressor and turbine.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GAS TURBINE ENGINES 9

Illustration of working gas turbine cycle – Thrust equation – Factors affecting thrust – Methods
of thrust augmentation – Engine performance parameters – Performance analysis of turboprop,
turbofan and turbojet.

UNIT II INLETS 9
Internal flow and Stall in subsonic inlets – Boundary layer separation – Major features of
external flow near a subsonic inlet – Relation between minimum area ratio and eternal
deceleration ratio – Diffuser performance – Supersonic inlets – Starting problem on supersonic
inlets – Shock swallowing by area variation – External declaration – Models of inlet operation.

UNIT III COMBUSTION CHAMBERS AND NOZZLE 9

Classification of combustion chambers – Important factors affecting combustion chamber
design – Combustion process – Combustion chamber performance – Effect of operating
variables on performance – Flame tube cooling – Flame stabilization – Use of flame holders.
Isentropic flow through nozzles – Nozzle efficiency – Ejector and variable area nozzles –
Interaction of nozzle flows with adjacent surfaces – Thrust reversal – Numerical problems.

UNIT IV COMPRESSORS 9
Principle of operation of centrifugal compressor – Work done and pressure rise – Velocity
diagrams – Diffuser vane design considerations – Concept of prewhirl – Rotation stall –
Elementary theory of axial flow compressor – Velocity triangles – degree of reaction – Three
dimensional – Air angle distributions for free vortex and constant reaction designs –
Compressor blade design – Centrifugal and Axial compressor performance characteristics.

UNIT V TURBINE 9
Principle of operation of axial flow turbines – work done and pressure rise – degree of reaction –
types of design of turbines – turbine blade cooling- velocity diagrams- limitations of radial flow
turbines- compressor & turbine matching – materials for turbine blades.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Predict performance characteristics of jet engines based upon the cycle operation.
CO2: Acquire knowledge on the operation of subsonic inlets and various methods of supersonic
inlet starting and their operating characteristics.
CO3: Get exposure the combustion processes inside combustion chamber and uses of after
burner engines and they can solve nozzle performance variation due to altitude change.
CO4: Explain the working of compressor and preliminary design calculation of compressor blades.
CO5: Acquire knowledge on the working of turbine, turbine blade cooling method and matching
of compressor and turbines.
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1         
CO2       
CO3       
CO4         
CO5         

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Ahmed F. El – Sayed, “Aircraft Propulsion and Gas turbine engines”, CRC Press Taylor
and Francis group, Second Edition 2017.
02. Hill, P.G. & Peterson, C.R. “Mechanics & Thermodynamics of Propulsion” Pearson
education, 2009.

REFERENCES:
01. Cohen, H. Rogers, G.F.C. and Saravanamuttoo, H.I.H. “Gas Turbine Theory”, Pearson
Education Canada; 6th edition, 2008.
02. Ganesan. V “ Gas turbine”, third edition,Mc Graw Hill Education Private Ltd, New delhi.
03. Mathur, M.L. and Sharma, R.P., “Gas Turbine, Jet and Rocket
Propulsion”,standard Publishers & Distributors, Delhi, 2nd edition 2014.
04. Oates, G.C., “Aero thermodynamics of Aircraft Engine Components”, AIAA
Education Series, New York, 1985.

AE5404 AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
1. To impart knowledge on the concepts of EAS, TAS and ISA.
2. To provide the basic equations governing the steady performance of airplanes.
3. To describe the gliding and climbing flights and the parameters that decide those
performances.
4. To provide the methods to calculate the approximate total takeoff and landing distance.
5. To introduce the concept of load factor and provides necessary equations to assess the
turn performance of an airplane.

UNIT I GENERAL CONCEPTS 9

International Standard atmosphere, IAS, EAS, TAS, Propeller theory- Froude momentum and
blade element theories, Propeller co-efficients, Use of propeller charts, Performance of fixed and
variable pitch propellers, High lift devices, Thrust augmentation.

UNIT II DRAG OF BODIES 9

Streamlined and bluff body, Types of drag, Effect of Reynold’s number on skin friction and
pressure drag, Drag reduction of airplanes, Drag polar, Effect of Mach number on drag polar.
Concept of sweep- effect of sweep on drag.

UNIT III STEADY LEVEL FLIGHT 9

General equation of motion of an airplane. Steady level flight, Thrust required and Power
required, Thrust available and Power available for propeller driven and jet powered aircraft, Effect
of altitude, maximum level flight speed, conditions for minimum drag and minimum power
required, Effect of drag divergence on maximum velocity, Range and Endurance of Propeller and
Jet aircrafts. Effect of wind on range and endurance.

UNIT IV GLIDING AND CLIMBING FLIGHT 9

Shallow and steep angles of climb, Rate of climb, Climb hodograph, Maximum Climb angle and
Maximum Rate of climb- Effect of design parameters for propeller jet and glider aircrafts,
Absolute and service ceiling, Cruise climb, Gliding flight, Glide hodograph.

UNIT V ACCELERATED FLIGHT 9

Estimation of take-off and landing distances, Methods of reducing landing distance, level turn,
minimum turn radius, maximum turn rate, bank angle and load factor, Constraints on load factor,
SST and MSTR. Pull up and pull down maneuvers, V-n diagram.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Prepare the drag polar diagram and associated equations for subsonic airplanes.
CO2: Calculate the range and endurance of jet and propeller airplanes under given operating
conditions.
CO3: Assess the performance of airplanes during steady glide and climb.
CO4: Decide the factors for takeoff and landing distance of airplanes.
CO5: Draw the flight envelope of given aircraft.
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1        
CO2       
CO3      
CO4       
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Anderson, Jr., J.D. Aircraft Performance and Design, McGraw-Hill International Edition,
1999.
02. Houghton,E.L. and Carruthers, N.B. Aerodynamics for engineering students, Edward
Arnold Publishers, 1988.

REFERENCES:
01. Anderson, J.D., Introduction to Flight, McGraw-Hill; 8th edition , 2015
02. Clancy, L J., Aerodynamics, Shroff publishers (2006)
03. John J Bertin., Aerodynamics for Engineers, Prentice Hall; 6th edition, 2013.
04. Kuethe, A.M. and Chow, C.Y., Foundations of Aerodynamics, John Wiley & Sons; 5th
Edition, 1997.

AE5411 AERODYNAMICS LABORATORY LTPC

 0 042
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this laboratory course are
1. To make the students familiarize with the calibration procedures of subsonic and
supersonic wind tunnel operations.
2. To enable the students observe the pressure distribution over the various
aerodynamics models.
3. To give students exposure to determine the various kinds of aerodynamic forces and
moments acting on the floating bodies.
4. To make the students to learn the principles of various flow visualization techniques
to observe the flow patterns of aerodynamic bodies.
5. To make students familiarize with the concept of drag estimation.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Calibration of a Subsonic Wind tunnel
2. Pressure distribution over a circular cylinder.
3. Pressure distribution over a cambered aerofoil.
4. Flow visualization studies in subsonic flows.
5. Pressure distribution over a finite wing of cambered aerofoil section
6. Pressure distribution over a Nose cone model.
7. Determination of Base drags of a missile model.
8. Determination of profile drag of bodies by wake survey method.
9. Study of flow field over a backward facing step
10. Calibration of Supersonic Wind Tunnel.
11. Flow visualization studies in supersonic flows.
12. Force measurements on Aircraft models
Any 10 experiments will be conducted from above 12 experiments

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Calibrate both low speed and high speed experimental facilities.
CO2: Identify variation in flow physics due to geometrical modifications and
orientations.
CO3: Estimate the various forces and moments acting on aerodynamics bodies.
CO4: Demonstrates the different aspect flow patterns of the aerodynamic bodies.
CO5: Predict and analyse various forms of drag and their contributions.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1      
CO2        
CO3       
CO4     
CO5       

AE5412 PROPULSION LABORATORY LTPC

0 042
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this laboratory course are
01. To determine the flow behaviour of free and wall jets.
02. To visualize the shock pattern in scramjet combustor model.
03. To provide an idea of wall pressure distribution on subsonic and supersonic inlets and
nozzles.
04. To perform testing on compressor blades and basic knowledge on cold flow studies.
05. To develop the ability to analyze and interpret the experimental data using software.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Velocity profiles of coaxial jets
2. Velocity profiles of free jets
3. Velocity profiles of wall jets
4. Wall pressure measurements of a turbine blade passage
5. Flow visualization in a scramjet combustion model
6. Cascade testing of compressor blades
7. Measurement of potential core length in supersonic jets
8. Flow visualization of secondary injection in a supersonic cross flow
9. Wall pressure distribution in subsonic diffusers
10. Wall pressure measurements in supersonic nozzles
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Explain the basic fundamental concepts in jet propulsion.
CO2: Get hands on experience on jet engine combustion.
CO3: Demonstrate the fundamental concepts of low speed and high speed jets and
experimental techniques pertain to measurements.
CO4: Get practical exposures on flow visualization techniques pertaining to supersonic flows.
CO5: Conduct the experiments pertaining to solid propellant combustion.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1        
CO2          
CO3         
CO4       
CO5        
HM5503 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE
LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
1. To introduce fundamental concepts of management and organisation to students.
2. To impart knowledge to students on various aspects of marketing, quality control and
marketing strategies.
3. To make students familiarize with the concepts of human resources management.
4. To acquaint students with the concepts of project management and cost analysis.
5. To make students familiarize with the concepts of planning process and business
strategies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATION 9

Concepts of Management and organization- nature, importance and Functions of Management,
Systems Approach to Management - Taylor's Scientific Management Theory- Fayal's Principles
of Management- Maslow's theory of Hierarchy of Human Needs- Douglas McGregor's Theory X
and Theory Y - Hertzberg Two Factor Theory of Motivation - Leadership Styles, Social
responsibilities of Management, Designing Organisational Structures: Basic concepts related to
Organisation - Departmentation and Decentralisation.

UNIT II OPERATIONS AND MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Principles and Types of Plant Layout-Methods of Production(Job, batch and Mass Production),
Work Study - Basic procedure involved in Method Study and Work Measurement - Business
Process Reengineering(BPR)- Statistical Quality Control: control charts for Variables and
Attributes (simple Problems) and Acceptance Sampling, Objectives of Inventory control, EOQ,
ABC Analysis, Purchase Procedure, Stores Management and Store Records - JIT System,
Supply Chain Management, Functions of Marketing, Marketing Mix, and Marketing Strategies
based on Product Life Cycle.

UNIT III HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT 9

Concepts of HRM, HRD and Personnel Management and Industrial Relations (PMIR), HRM vs
PMIR, Basic functions of HR Manager: Manpower planning, Recruitment, Selection, Training
and Development, Wage and Salary Administration, Promotion, Transfer, Performance
Appraisal, Grievance Handling and Welfare Administration, Job Evaluation and Merit Rating -
Capability Maturity Model (CMM) Levels.

UNIT IV PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Network Analysis, Programme Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT), Critical Path Method
(CPM), identifying critical path, Probability of Completing the project within given time, Project
Cost Analysis, Project Crashing (simple problems).

UNIT V STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND CONTEMPORARY 9

STRATEGIC ISSUES
Mission, Goals, Objectives, Policy, Strategy, Programmes, Elements of Corporate Planning
Process, Environmental Scanning, Value Chain Analysis, SWOT Analysis, Steps in Strategy
Formulation and Implementation, Generic Strategy alternatives. Bench Marking and Balanced
Score Card as Contemporary Business Strategies.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Plan an organizational structure for a given context in the organisation to carry
out production operations through Work-study.
CO2: Survey the markets, customers and competition better and price the given
products appropriately.
CO3: Ensure quality for a given product or service.
CO4: Plan, schedule and control projects through PERT and CPM.
CO5: Evolve a strategy for a business or service organisation.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1       
CO2       
CO3       
CO4       
CO5       

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Kanishka Bedi, Production and Operations Management, Oxford University Press, 2007.
02. Stoner, Freeman, Gilbert, Management, 6th Ed, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2004.
03. Thomas N.Duening & John M.Ivancevich Management—Principles and Guidelines,
Biztantra,2007.
04. P. Vijay Kumar, N. Appa Rao and Ashnab, Chnalill, Cengage Learning India, 2012.

REFERENCES:
01. Kotler Philip and Keller Kevin Lane: Marketing Management, Pearson, 2012.
02. Koontz and Weihrich: Essentials of Management, McGraw Hill, 2012.
03. Lawrence R Jauch, R. Gupta and William F. Glueck: Business Policy and Strategic
Management Science, McGraw Hill, 2012.
04. Samuel C. Certo: Modern Management, 2012.

AE5501 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To get insight into the basic aspects of compressible flow.
02. To arrive at the shock wave and expansion wave relations.
03. To get exposure on potential equation for 2-dimensionla compressible flow.
04. To get knowledge on high speed flow over airfoils, wings and airplane configuration.
05. To gain basic knowledge on low and high speed wind tunnels.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL ASPECTS OF COMPRESSIBLE FLOW 9

Compressibility, Continuity, Momentum and energy equation for steady one dimensional flow-
compressible Bernoulli’s equation-Calorically perfect gas, Mach Number, Speed of sound, Area
– Mach number – Velocity relation, Mach cone, Mach angle, One dimensional Isentropic flow
through variable area duct, Static and Stagnation properties, Critical conditions, Characteristic
Mach number, Area-Mach number relation, Maximum discharge velocity.
UNIT II SHOCK AND EXPANSION WAVES 9
Normal shock relations, Prandtl’s relation-Hugoniot equation, Raleigh Supersonic Pitot tube
equation-Moving normal shock waves, Oblique shocks, θ-β-M relation, Shock Polar, Reflection
of oblique shocks, left running and right running waves-Interaction of oblique shock waves, slip
line, Rayleigh flow, Fanno flow, Expansion waves, Prandtl-Meyer expansion, Maximum turning
angle, Simple and non-simple regions, operating characteristics of Nozzles, under expansion,
over expansion.

UNIT III TWO DIMENSIONAL COMPRESSIBLE FLOW 9

Potential equation for 2-dimensional compressible flow, Linearization of potential equation,
perturbation potential, Linearized Pressure Coefficient, Linearized subsonic flow, Prandtl-Glauert
rule, Linearized supersonic flow, Method of characteristics.

UNIT IV HIGH SPEED FLOW OVER AIRFOILS, WINGS AND AIRPLANE 9

CONFIGURATION
Critical Mach number, Drag divergence Mach number, Shock Stall, Supercritical Airfoil Sections,
Transonic area rule, Swept wing, Airfoils for supersonic flows, Lift, drag, Pitching moment and
Centre of pressure for supersonic profiles, Shock expansion theory, wave drag, supersonic
wings, Design considerations for supersonic aircrafts.

UNIT V CHARACTERIZATION OF HIGH SPEED FLOWS 9

Shock-Boundary layer interaction, Wind tunnels for transonic, Supersonic and hypersonic flows,
shock tube, Gun tunnels, Supersonic flow visualization, Introduction to Hypersonic Flows.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Acquire knowledge on the effect of compressibility at high-speeds and to make intelligent
design decisions based on this understanding. .
CO2: Gain insights on shock formation and dynamics and the ability to estimate the shock
location.
CO3: Estimate drag and lift forces on basic aerodynamic (lifting) shapes travelling at high-speed.
CO4: Determine the full high-speed flow field on thin airfoils, wedges, and in nozzles.
CO5: Apply the concepts of aerodynamics to the design of aerospace systems.
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1         
CO2         
CO3        
CO4         
CO5         

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Anderson, J. D, Modern Compressible Flow: With Historical Perspective McGraw-Hill
Education; 3rd edition, 2003.
02. Rathakrishnan. E, Gas Dynamics, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt., Ltd, 2008.

REFERENCES:
01. Oosthuizen,P.H., &Carscallen,W.E., Compressible Fluid Flow, CRC Press; 2nd edition
(July 22, 2013)
02. Shapiro, A. H., Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compressible Fluid Flow, Ronald
Press, 1982.
03. Zucrow, M. J. and Anderson, J. D., Elements of Gas Dynamics, McGraw- Hill &Co.,
1989.
AE5502 AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES
LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To familiarise the student, the generalized theory of pure bending and work out problems in
the calculation of bending stress involving different methods.
02. To gain knowledge in the concept of shear flow in thin-walled sections.
03. To carry out shear flow analysis involving different types of sections.
04. To Impart theoretical knowledge on the behaviour of thin plates and thin-walled columns.
05. To carry out basic stress analysis procedures involving aircraft structural components.
UNIT I UNSYMMETRICAL BENDING OF BEAMS 9
Unsymmetrical bending of beams – different methods of analysis (neutral axis method, ‘k’
method, and the principal axis method), stresses and deflections in beams under unsymmetrical
bending.

UNIT II SHEAR FLOW IN OPEN SECTIONS 9

Definition and expression for shear flow due to bending, shear flow in thin-walled Open sections
with and without stiffening elements, torsion of thin-walled Open sections, the shear center of
symmetric and unsymmetrical open sections, structural idealization.

UNIT III SHEAR FLOW IN CLOSED SECTIONS 9

Shear flow due to bending and torsion in single-cell and multi-cell structures, the shear center of
symmetric and unsymmetrical closed sections, effect of structural idealization, shear flow in a
tapered beam, stress analysis of thin-webbed beams using Wagner’s theory.

UNIT IV BUCKLING OF PLATES 9

Behaviour of a rectangular plate under compression, governing equation for plate buckling,
buckling analysis of sheets and stiffened panel under compression, concept of the effective
sheet width, buckling due to shear and combined loading, crippling.

UNIT V AIRCRAFT STRESS ANALYSIS 9

Loading and analysis of aircraft wing, fuselage, and tail unit. Use of V-n diagram for sizing the
aircraft wing, fuselage, and tail unit.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to

CO1: Analyse and investigate the normal stress variation on unsymmetrical sections
subjected to bending moments.
CO2: Determine the shear flow variation in thin walled open sections with skin effective and
ineffective in bending. Also to find out the shear centre of sections.
CO3: Calculate the shear flow variation in single cell and multicell tubes subjected to shear
and torque loads
CO4: Investigate the behaviour of buckling of simply supported plates and also to know the
effective width of sheet stringers combination.
CO5: Analyse the shear and bending moment variation of aircraft wing and fuselage and
also to know the characteristics of thin webbed beams.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1       
CO2        
CO3         
CO4        
CO5         
TEXT BOOKS:
01. Bruhn. E.H., ‘Analysis and Design of Flight Vehicles Structures’, Tri-state off-set
company, USA, 1985.
02. Howard D Curtis, ‘Fundamentals of Aircraft Structural Analysis’, WCB-McGraw Hill,
1997.
03. Megson T M G, ‘Aircraft Structures for Engineering Students’, Butterworth-Heinemann;
5th edition, 2012.

REFERENCES:
01. Peery, D.J., and Azar, J.J., Aircraft Structures, 2nd edition, McGraw – Hill, N.Y., 1999.
02. Rivello, R.M., Theory and Analysis of Flight Structures, McGraw Hill, 1993.

AE5503 ROCKET PROPULSION

LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To introduce the basic concepts of jet propulsion.
02. To make students learn the operating and performance characteristics of ramjet engines.
03. To impart knowledge on the needs, various challenges in scramjet combustion and the
applications of scramjet to hypersonic vehicle operations.
04. To give exposure to the students on the various kinds of propellants and internal ballistics of
solid rocket motor.
05. To make the students familiarize with the various subsystems of liquid, hybrid rockets and
importance aspects of advanced propulsion systems.

UNIT I RAMJET PROPULSION 9

Operating principle of ramjet engine – various components of ramjet engines and their
efficiencies – modes of inlet operation - Combustion in ramjet engine –- performance
characteristics – sample ramjet design calculations – flame stability problems in ramjet
combustors –integral ram rockets.

UNIT II SCRAMJET PROPULSION 9

Introduction to hypersonic air breathing propulsion, hypersonic vehicles and supersonic
combustion- need for supersonic combustion for hypersonic propulsion – salient features of
scramjet engine and its applications for hypersonic vehicles – problems associated with
supersonic combustion – engine/airframe integration aspects of hypersonic vehicles – various
types scramjet combustors – fuel injection schemes in scramjet combustors – one dimensional
models for supersonic combustion using method of influence coefficients.

UNIT III SOLID ROCKET MOTOR 9

Type of rockets – specific impulse of a rocket– rocket performance – Real and ideal nozzle -
solid propellants– selection criteria of solid propellants – – internal ballistics – burning rate -
propellant grain design considerations – erosive burning in solid rockets – Igniters – types of
igniters.
UNIT IV LIQUID AND HYBRID ROCKET ENGINES 9
liquid propellant rockets – selection of liquid propellants – various feed systems for liquid
rockets -thrust control in liquid rockets – cooling in liquid rockets and the associated heat
transfer problems – advantages of liquid rockets over solid rockets - introduction to hybrid
propulsion – advantages and limitations of hybrid propulsion - static testing of rockets and
safety considerations.

UNIT V ADVANCED PROPULSION TECHNIQUES 9

Introduction to nozzleless propulsion and basic concepts - Electric rocket propulsion – Ion
propulsion – Nuclear rocket – comparison of performance of these propulsion systems with
chemical rocket propulsion systems - Solar sail.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Predict, analyse and design model ramjet engines.
CO2: Acquire knowledge in field of supersonic combustion process and their difficulties
involved.
CO3: Predict the internal ballistic properties based on mission requirements.
CO4: Determine operational and performance characteristics of liquid and hybrid rockets.
CO5: Acquire knowledge in the field of advance propulsive systems and their futuristic
applications.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO1 PO1
0 1 2
CO1         
CO2         
CO3       
CO4       
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
01. David H. Heiser and David T. Pratt., “Hypersonic Air breathing Propulsion”, AIAA Education
Series, 1999.
02. Mathur, M.L. and Sharma, R.P., “Gas Turbine, Jet and Rocket Propulsion”, Standard
Publishers & Distributors, Delhi, 2nd edition 2014.
03. Sutton, G.P., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons; 8th Edition 2010

REFERENCES:
01. Martin J. Chiaverini and Kenneth K. Kuo, “Fundamentals of Hybrid Rocket Combustion and
Propulsion”, Progress in Astronautics and Aeronautics, 2007.
02. Ramamurthi K, “Rocket Propulsion”, Macmillian publishers India Ltd, 1st edition, 2010.
AE5511 AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES LABORATORY
LTPC
0 042
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this laboratory course are
01. To enable the students understand the behaviour of aircraft structural components under
different loading conditions.
02. To provide an exposure to photo elasticity and its applications in stress analysis
03. To familiarize with unsymmetrical bending of beams and shafts
04. To familiarize with the fabrication of composite laminates.
05.To impart knowledge in non destructive evaluation

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Verification of the Superposition Principle & Maxwell’s Reciprocal Theorem
2. Unsymmetrical Bending of Beams
3. Installation and Performance of Electrical Resistance Strain Gauges
4. Strain Measurement Using Electrical Resistance Strain Gauges
5. Shear Center Position of a Thin-Walled Beam
6. Experiments in Photoelasticity
7. Calibration of a Photoelastic Specimen
8. Fabrication of a Composite Laminate
9. Flexure Tests of Composite Specimens
10. Experimental Determination of the Buckling Load of Columns
11. Thin –Walled Column Strength
12. Acoustic & Ultrasonic Testing of Composites
13. Free Vibration Studies with Beams
14. Forced Vibration Testing

Any 10 experiments will be conducted from above 14 experiments

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Practical behaviour of aircraft structural Components Under different loading conditions.
CO2: Student will have hands-on experience in the area of testing of structural components.
CO3: Student will able to demonstrate the basics experimental techniques in photoelasticity.
CO4: Student will have an exposure to data interpretation/analysis of vibration measuring
instruments.
CO5: Student will have practical knowledge in the field of fabrication and testing of Composite
material specimens.
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1      
CO2       
CO3      
CO4      
CO5       
AE5512 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING/INTERNSHIP

LTPC
0 042
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
This course is aimed to provide more weightage for project work. The project work could be done
in the form of a summer project or internship in the industry or even a minor practical project in
the college. Participation in any technical event/ competition to fabricate and demonstrate an
innovative machine or product could be encouraged under this course.

TOTAL = 60 PERIODS

AE5601 AIRCRAFT STABILITY AND CONTROL L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To impart knowledge on the criteria for longitudinally stable configuration.
02. To provide the aspects of weathercock stability and requirements of rudder.
03. To impart knowledge on dihedral effect and aileron control power.
04. To provide the methodology to obtain the characteristic modes of an airplane in longitudinal
motion.
05. To impart knowledge on autorotation and spin and Dutch roll motions of airplanes.
UNIT I STATIC LONGITUDINAL STABILITY AND CONTROL 9
General concepts-Degrees of freedom of a rigid body, Static and dynamic stability, Need for
stability in an airplane, inherently and marginally stable airplanes, Stability and Controllability,
Requirements of control surfaces, criteria for longitudinal static stability, contribution to stability
by wing, tail, fuselage, wing fuselage combination, Total longitudinal stability, Neutral point-Stick
fixed and Stick free aspects, Free elevator factor, static margin, Hinge moment, Power effects on
stability-propeller and jet aircrafts, longitudinal control, Movement of centre of gravity, elevator
control effectiveness, elevator control power, elevator angle to trim, elevator angle per g,
maneuver point, Stick force gradient and stick force per g, Aerodynamic balancing.

UNIT II STATIC DIRECTIONAL STABILITY AND CONTROL 9

Directional stability-yaw and sideslip, Criterion of directional stability, contribution to static
directional stability by wing, fuselage, tail, Power effects on directional stability-propeller and jet
aircrafts, Rudder fixed and rudder free aspects, Rudder lock and Dorsal fin, Directional control,
rudder control effectiveness, rudder requirements, adverse yaw, asymmetric power condition,
spin recovery.

UNIT III STATIC LATERAL STABILTY AND CONTROL 9

Lateral stability-Dihedral effect, criterion for lateral stability, evaluation of lateral stability-
contribution of fuselage, wing, wing fuselage, tail, total static lateral stability, lateral control,
aileron control power, aileron effectiveness, strip theory estimation of aileron effectiveness, roll
control by spoilers, aileron reversal, aileron reversal speed.

UNIT IV DYNAMIC LONGITUDINAL STABILITY 9

Aircraft Equations of motion, small disturbance theory, Estimation of longitudinal stability
derivatives stability derivatives, Routh’s discriminant, solving the stability quadratic, Phugoid
motion, Factors affecting the period and damping.
UNIT V DYNAMIC LATERAL AND DIRECTIONAL STABILITY 9
Dutch roll and spiral instability, Auto rotation and spin, Stability derivatives for lateral and
directional dynamics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Obtain static margin of airplane in stick fixed and free aspects.
CO2: Successfully design the rudder by considering the critical situations that demand the use of
rudder.
CO3: Estimate total lateral stability of an airplane.
CO4: Determine the natural frequency and damping ratio of phugoid and short period motions.
CO5: Explain the recovery procedure of an airplane from dangerous situations like autorotation
and spin.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1        
CO2        
CO3        
CO4        
CO5       
TEXT BOOKS:
01. Nelson, R.C. Flight Stability & Automatic Control, McGraw Hill, 1998.
02. Perkins C.D. & Hage R.E. Airplane performance, stability and control, John Wiley & Sons
1967.
REFERENCES:
01. Babister, A.W. Aircraft Stability and response, Pergamon Press, 1980.
02. Etkin, B., Dynamics of Flight Stability and Control, Wiley, third edition 1995.
03. McCormick, B.W. Aerodynamics, Aeronautics & Flight Mechanics John Wiley, 1995.
04. Pamadi, B.N. Performance, Stability, Dynamics, and Control of Airplanes, AIAA
Education Series, 2004.

AE5602 COMPOSITE MATERIALS AND STRUCTURES

L T PC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
1. To impart knowledge in the mechanical behaviour of anisotropic materials and how they
differ from classical construction materials.
2. To familiarize with the classical lamination theory to analyse the stiffness and strength of
composite laminates
3. To impart knowledge to Design a composite laminate with given requirements.
4. To familiarize the methods for more advanced tools of composites analysis and design
including failure theories and their implementation, the effect of holes and cracks, fatigue.
5. To familiarize with the different manufacturing process available to manufacture composite
structures.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION & MICROMECHANICS 9
Introduction – Aerospace Application of Composite Materials – Types of Reinforcements and
Matrices – Classification of Composite Materials – Micromechanics – Mechanics of Materials
Approach – Elasticity Approach – Prediction of Elastic Constants – Effect of Voids in Composites
– Load Sharing – Longitudinal Strength of a Uni-directional Lamina – Minimum & Critical Volume
Fractions.

UNIT II MACROMECHANICS APPROACH 9

Generalized Hooke’s Law – Elastic Constants for Anisotropic, Orthotropic and Isotropic
Materials – Experimental Determination of Lamina Properties – Lamina Stiffness Matrix –
Stress-strain Relations with Respect to Natural & Arbitrary Axis – Determination of Lamina
Properties & Lamina Strength – Failure Theories For an Orthotropic Lamina – Hygrothermal
effects on a Lamina.

UNIT III LAMINATED PLATE THEORY 9

Governing differential equation for a Laminate – Classical Lamination Theory – Stress – Strain
Relations For a laminate – In plane and Flexural constants of a laminate – Response and
Behaviour of Different Laminate Types – Determination of Laminate Stiffness Matrix –
Hygrothermal Stresses and Strains – Failure analysis of a laminate – Laminate Impact
resistance and Interlaminar Stresses.

UNIT IV FABRICATION PROCESS AND REPAIR METHODS 9

Various Open and Closed Mould Processes – Manufacture of Fibers – Importance of Repair and
Different Types of Repair Techniques in Composites – Autoclave and Other Methods for the
Production of Composite Parts – Non-destructive Evaluation of Composite Parts.

UNIT V SANDWICH CONSTRUCTION 9

Basic Design Concepts of Sandwich Construction – Materials Used for Sandwich Construction –
Failure Modes of Sandwich Panels – Bending and Shear Stress in Sandwich Beams –
Fabrication of Sandwich Panels – Testing of Sandwich Materials – Use of Sandwich
Construction in Aircraft and Space Structures.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1: Classify the different composite material based on fibre and matrix factors.
CO2: Solve problems related to micromechanics of composite laminas.
CO3: Analyse and apply the different failure theories.
CO4:Impart knowledge on the Behaviour and Response of Laminated Plates
CO5: Demonstrates the different production processes of composite structures.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1       
CO2       
CO3       
CO4       
CO5       

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Agarwal, B.D., and Broutman, L.J., "Analysis and Performance of Fibre Composites,"
John Wiley & Sons, 3rd edition, July 2006.
REFERENCES:
01. Alan Baker, Composite Materials for Aircraft Structures, AIAA Series, 2ndEdition, 2004.
02. Autar K Kaw, ‘Mechanics of Composite Materials’, CRC Press, 2nd edition, 2005
03. Calcote, L R. “The Analysis of laminated Composite Structures”, Von – Nostrand
Reinhold Company, New York 1998.
04. Isaac M. Daniel &OriIshai, "Mechanics of Composite Materials," OUP USA publishers,
2ndedition, 2005.
05. Lubing, Handbook on Advanced Plastics and Fibre Glass, Von Nostran Reinhold Co.,
New York, 1989.

AE5603 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To gain basic ideas on numerical fluid dynamics
02. To acquire knowledge on the basic concepts involved in grid generation in computational fluid
dynamics
03. To impart knowledge on various aspects of time dependent methods
04. To get insight into finite volume method.
05. To arrive at the solution of fluid flow equations and to apply those concepts for industrial
needs.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL METHODS IN FLUID DYNAMICS 9

Introduction to numerical fluid dynamics - Introduction to governing equations of fluid dynamics
and modelling of fluid flow – The substantial derivative and the physical meaning of divergence of
a vector. Boundary conditions for various types of fluid flow conditions - Introduction to
mathematical properties of fluid dynamic equations and classification of partial differential
equations - General behaviour of different classes of partial differential equations and their
relation to fluid dynamics - A general discussion on hyperbolic, parabolic and elliptic equations.

UNIT II GRID GENERATION 9

Introduction to grid generation in computational fluid dynamics - Structured grid generation
techniques – algebraic methods, conformal mapping and methods using partial differential
equations - Boundary value problem of numerical grid generation- grid control functions- branch
cut - The boundary conditions of first kind - orthogonality of grid lines- boundary point grid control.
Unstructured grids, Cartesian grids, hybrid grids, grids around typical 2D and 3D geometries.

UNIT III TIME DEPENDENT METHODS 9

Introduction to time dependent methods - Explicit time dependent methods –Description of Lax-
Wendroff Scheme and Mac Cormack’s two step predictor – corrector method - Description of time
split methods. Introduction to implicit methods and respective stability properties of explicit and
implicit methods - Construction of implicit methods for time dependent problems - Linearization,
choice of explicit operator and numerical dissipation aspects.

UNIT IV FINITE VOLUME METHOD 9

Introduction to Finite volume Method - Different Flux evaluation schemes, central, upwind and
hybrid schemes - Staggered grid approach - Pressure-Velocity coupling - SIMPLE, SIMPLER
algorithms- pressure correction equation (both incompressible and compressible forms) -
Application of Finite Volume Method -artificial diffusion.
UNIT V SOLUTION OF FLUID FLOW EQUATIONS & CFD FOR 9
INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS
Introduction to boundary layer equations and their solution - Discretization of the boundary layer
equations and illustration of solution– Solution methods for elliptic, parabolic and hyperbolic
equations.
Various levels of approximation of flow equations, turbulence modelling for viscous flows,
verification and validation of CFD codes, application of CFD tools to 3D configurations.
Introduction to commercial CFD software for aerospace applications. High performance computing
for CFD applications – Parallelization of codes – Domain decomposition.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Acquire knowledge on the mathematical nature of fluid dynamic equations and to specify
boundary conditions.
CO2: Generate grid by using numerical methods.
CO3: Apply time dependant methods for 1-Dand 2-Dflow problems.
CO4: Acquire knowledge on various flux evaluation schemes and on pressure- velocity coupling
procedure.
CO5: Gain insights on performance computing and parallelization of complex codes.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1        
CO2       
CO3        
CO4         
CO5         

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Fletcher C.A.J. , “Computational Techniques for Fluid Dynamics 1” Springer Verlag, 1996.
02. Fletcher C.A.J., “Computational Techniques for Fluid Dynamics 2”, Springer Verlag, 1995.

REFERENCES:
01. Chung T. J., “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press; 2nd edition,
2010.
02. Hirsch C., “Numerical Computation of Internal and External Flows” Volume-2, John Wiley
and Sons, 1994.
03. Joel H. Ferziger & Milovan Peric, “Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics” Springer;
3rd edition 2002.
04. John F Wendt , “Computational Fluid Dynamics – An Introduction”, 3rd Edition, Springer-
Verlag, Berlin Heidelberg, 2009.
05. Versteeg H.K. and Malalsekera W. “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics, The
Finite Volume Method”, PHI; 2nd edition 2007.
AE5611 AIRCRAFT DESIGN PROJECT I LTPC
0 042
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To familiarise with data collections of different airplanes.
02. To get hands on experience in weight estimations
03. To finalize the geometric parameters of airplanes.
04. To familiarise with the performance characteristics of airplanes.
05. To investigate the stability of the system when subjected to disturbance.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Comparative studies of different types of airplanes and their specifications and performance
details with reference to the design work under taken.
2. Preliminary weight estimation, Selection of design parameters, power plant selection,
aerofoil selection, fixing the geometry of Wing, tail, control surfaces Landing gear selection.
3. Preparation of layout drawing, construction of balance and three view diagrams of the
airplane under consideration.
4. Drag estimation, Performance calculations, Stability analysis and V-n diagram.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1:Do preliminary design of an aircraft starting from data collection to satisfy mission
specifications.
CO2: Get familiarized with the estimation of geometric and design parameters of an airplane.
CO3:Carry out the procedure involved in weight estimation, power plant selection, and estimation
of the performance parameters.
CO4: Initiate the design of a system, component, or process to meet requirements for aircraft
systems.
CO5: Work in a multidisciplinary environment involving the integration of engineering practices in
such subjects as aerodynamics, structures, propulsion, and flight mechanics.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1      
CO2     
CO3      
CO4     
CO5     
AE5612 FLIGHT TRAINING LABORATORY
LTPC
0 042
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To make students learn the steps involved in CG determination.
02. To introduce the methods of calibrating various flight instruments.
03. To impart practical knowledge to students on determining various performance parameters.
04. To find the neutral points and maneuver points in an aircraft.
05. To impart practical knowledge to students about different modes of stability such as Dutch
roll, phugoid motion etc.
 The experiments will be conducted by the students during the flight training
programme at IIT- Kanpur and evaluation is also done by the faculty of IIT-Kanpur.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. C.G. determination
2. Calibration of ASI and Altimeter
3. Calibration of special instruments
4. Cruise and climb performance
5. Determination of stick fixed & stick free neutral points
6. Determination of stick fixed & stick free maneuver points
7. Verification of Lateral-directional equations of motion for a steady state side slip
maneuver
8. Verification of Lateral-directional equations of motion for a steady state coordinated turn
9. Flight determination of drag polar of a glider
10. Demonstration of stall, Phugoid motion and Dutch roll
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Acquire flying experience on a trainer aircraft.
CO2: Determine the C.G position of an airplane.
CO3: Calculate the performance parameters such as rate of climb, climb angle etc.
CO4: Compute the stability parameters such as stick fixed neutral point, stick free
neutral point and control parameters such as stick fixed manoeuvre point, stick
free manoeuvre point.
CO5: Get practical experience of Dutch roll and phugoid motion.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1       
CO2       
CO3       
CO4       
CO5       
AE5701 FINITE ELEMENT METHOD
LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To give exposure to various methods of solution, in particular the finite element method.
02. To expose the student to a wide variety of problems involving discrete and continuum
elements
03. To impart knowledge in the basic theory of finite element formulation.
04. To allow the student to learn and understanding how element characteristic matrices are
generated
05. To impart knowledge in assembly of finite element equations, and solve for the unknowns.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Review of various approximate methods – Raleigh Ritz’s, Galerkin and finite difference methods-
Governing equation and convergence criteria of finite element method.

UNIT II DISCRETE ELEMENTS 9

Bar elements, uniform sections, mechanical and thermal loading, varying section, truss analysis.
Beam element with various loadings and boundary conditions - longitudinal and lateral vibration.
Use of local and natural coordinates.

UNIT III CONTINUUM ELEMENTS 9

Plane stress, Plane strain and axisymmetric problems, constant and linear strain triangular
elements, stiffness matrix, axisymmetric load vector.

UNIT IV ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS 9

Definitions, Shape function for 4, 8 and 9 nodal quadrilateral elements, Stiffness matrix and
consistent load vector, Gaussian integration.

UNIT V FIELD PROBLEM 9

Heat transfer problems, Steady state fin problems, Derivation of element matrices for two
dimensional problems, Torsion problems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to

CO1: Have overall understanding of various approximate methods used for solving structural
mechanics problems. Be able to understand the formulation of governing equation for the
finite element method, convergence criteria and advantage over other approximate
methods.
CO2: Have the capability to solve 1-D problems related to static analysis of structural members.
CO3: Formulate the elemental matrices for 2-D problems.
CO4: Get an exposure to isoparametric element formulations and importance of numerical
integration.
CO5: Solve Eigen value problems and scalar field problems.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1      
CO2      
CO3      
CO4      
CO5      

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Dhanaraj. R and K.Prabhakaran Nair, “Finite Element Method “, Oxford university press,
India, 2015.
02. Rao. S.S., The Finite Element Methods in Engineering, Butterworth and Heinemann, 5th
edition, 2010.
03. Reddy J.N. – An Introduction to Finite Element Method – McGraw Hill, 3rd edition, 2005.
04. Tirupathi.R. Chandrapatha and Ashok D. Belegundu – Introduction to Finite Elements in
Engineering – Prentice Hall India, 3rd Edition, 2003.

REFERENCES:
01. Bathe K.J. and Wilson, E.L., Numerical Methods in Finite Elements Analysis, Prentice Hall
of India, 1985.
02. Krishnamurthy, C.S., Finite Element Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd edition, 2001.
03. Larry J Segerlind, ‘Applied Finite Element Analysis’, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.
1985.
04. Robert D Cook, David S Malkus, Michael E Plesha, ‘Concepts and Applications of Finite
Element Analysis’, 4th edition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 2003.

AE5702 ROCKETS AND MISSILES

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To impart knowledge on the aerodynamic characteristics of different classes of missiles.
02. To provide the methodology to estimate the drag on a subsonic/supersonic missile.
03. To introduce the 1D and 2D motion of rockets in free space and in homogeneous gravitational
field.
04. To explore the need for multi staging in rockets.
05. To introduce the various types control techniques used on missiles and rockets.

UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF ROCKETS AND LAUNCH VEHICLES 9

Various methods of classification of missiles and rockets-Basic Aerodynamic characteristics of
launch vehicle configurations-Examples of various Indian space launch vehicles-Current status
of Indian rocket programme with respect to international scenario.

UNIT II AERODYNAMICS OF ROCKETS AND LAUNCH VEHICLES 9

Airframe components of rockets and Launch Vehicles – forces acting on a missile while passing
through atmosphere – slender body aerodynamics – method of describing forces and moments –
lift force and lateral moment –lateral aerodynamic damping moment – longitudinal moment – drag
estimation-Rocket Dispersion.
UNIT III ROCKET MOTION IN FREE SPACE AND GRAVITATIONAL 9
FIELD
One dimensional and two-dimensional rocket motions in free space and homogeneous
gravitational fields – description of vertical, inclined and gravity turn trajectories – determination of
range and altitude – simple approximations to burnout velocity and altitude – estimation of
culmination time and altitude – Ballistic trajectories.

UNIT IV STAGING OF ROCKETS AND LAUNCH VEHICLES 9

Design philosophy behind multi staging of launch vehicles– multistage vehicle optimization –
stage separation techniques in atmosphere and in space – stage separation dynamics and lateral
separation characteristics – Coasting phase.

UNIT V CONTROL OF ROCKETS AND LAUNCH VEHICLES 9

Introduction to aerodynamic control and jet control methods- thrust control methods – various
types of jet control methods including secondary injection thrust vector control for launch vehicles
– Characteristics of aerodynamic control methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Classify missiles based on different aspects.
CO2: Calculate the forces and moments that act on a missile in atmosphere.
CO3: Perform the calculations pertaining to altitude and range covered by rockets in homogeneous
gravitational field.
CO4: Optimize a multi stage rocket based on given constraint.
CO5: Demonstrate the principles and the practical complications involved in aerodynamic and jet
control of missiles.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1      
CO2      
CO3      
CO4        
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Cornelisse, J.W., “Rocket Propulsion and Space Dynamics”, J.W. Freeman & Co.,Ltd,
London, 1982.
02. Sutton, G.P., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons; 8th Edition 2010.

REFERENCES:
01. Mathur, M.L. and Sharma, R.P., “Gas Turbine, Jet and Rocket Propulsion”, Standard
Publishers & Distributors, Delhi, 2nd edition 2014.
AE5703 EXPERIMENTAL AERODYNAMICS
LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01.To learn the basic measurements involved in fluid mechanics
02. To analyze and compare the performance of various low and high speed wind tunnels.
03. To visualize incompressible and compressible flows using various techniques.
04. To measure flow filed variables using pitot-static-probes, transducers and anemometers.
05.To gain basic knowledge on special flows and to perform uncertainty analysis for their
experiments

UNIT I BASIC MEASUREMENTS IN FLUID MECHANICS 9

Objective of experimental studies –– Measuring instruments – Performance terms associated
with measurement systems –– Components of measuring systems - Data acquisition and
processing – Signal conditioning – Flow similarity – Model design and construction.

UNIT II WIND TUNNEL MEASEUREMENTS 9

Characteristic features, operation and performance of low speed, transonic, supersonic and
special tunnels - Power losses in a wind tunnel – Instrumentation and calibration of wind tunnels
– Turbulence- Wind tunnel balance – Wire balance – Strut-type – Platform-type – Yoke-type –
Pyramid type – Strain gauge balance – Balance calibration.

UNIT III FLOW VISUALIZATION AND ANALOGUE METHODS 9

Visualization techniques – Smoke tunnel – Hele-Shaw apparatus - Interferometer – Fringe-
Displacement method – Schlieren system – Shadowgraph - Hydraulic analogy – Hydraulic jumps
– Electrolytic tank.

UNIT IV PRESSURE, VELOCITY AND TEMPERATURE 9

MEASUREMENTS
Pitot - static tube characteristics - Velocity measurements - Hot-wire anemometry – Constant
current and Constant temperature Hot-Wire anemometer – Pressure measurement techniques -
Pressure transducers – Temperature measurements.

UNIT V SPECIAL FLOWS AND UNCERTAINTY ANALYSIS 9

Experiments on Taylor- Proudman theorem and Ekman layer – Measurements in boundary
layers -– Uncertainty analysis – Estimation of measurement errors – External estimate of the
error – Internal estimate of the error – Uncertainty calculation - Uses of uncertainty analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Determine the performance parameters of the various measuring instruments.
CO2: Acquire knowledge on the practical elements of experimental aerodynamics and to develop
an appreciation for how aerodynamic data are acquired.
CO3: Have the ability to apply modern instrumentation and measurement techniques to the
acquisition of aerodynamic data and understand the inherent limitations of each technique.
CO4: Estimate experimental uncertainty.
CO5: Demonstrate the principles of three component and six component balances associated
with wind tunnels.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1       
CO2       
CO3         
CO4        
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Jewel B. Barlow,William H. Rae, Jr.Alan Pope,“ Low-Speed WindTunnel Testing”, 3rd
Edition,John Wiley & Sons, Inc,1999.
02. Pope, A., and Goin, L., "High Speed Wind Tunnel Testing", John Wiley, 1978.

REFERENCES:
01. Rathakrishnan, E., “Instrumentation, Measurements, and Experiments in Fluids,” CRC
Press – Taylor & Francis, 2007.
02. Robert B Northrop, “Introduction to Instrumentation and Measurements”, 2nd Edition, CRC
Press, Taylor & Francis, 2006.

AE5711 AIRCRAFT DESIGN PROJECT II LTPC

0 042
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
1. To familiarize with Lift distribution and structural load distribution in aircraft wing
2. To gain knowledge in drawing the sheer force and bending moment diagram for wing
structure.
3. Enable the student to design the load carrying members such as spars, ribs and stringers in
wing.
4. To gain knowledge in plotting the shear flow for wing box
5. To familiarize with the bulkhead design and enable the student to design the Oleo strut used
in landing gears.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Preliminary design of an aircraft wing – Shrenck’s curve, structural load distribution, shear
force, bending moment and torque diagrams.
2. Detailed design of an aircraft wing – Design of spars and stringers, bending stress and
shear flow calculations – buckling analysis of wing panels.
3. Preliminary design of an aircraft fuselage – load distribution on an aircraft fuselage.
4. Detailed design of an aircraft fuselage – design of bulkheads and longerons – bending
stress and shear flow calculations – buckling analysis of fuselage panels.
5. Design of control surfaces – balancing and maneuvering loads on the tail plane and
aileron, rudder loads.
6. Design of wing-root attachment.
7. Landing gear design.
8. Preparation of a detailed design report with CAD drawing.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Analyse the lift distribution on an aircraft wing.
CO2: Design the structural load carrying members of wing.
CO3: Design the fuselage structure.
CO4: Investigate the shear flow on wing and fuselage structures.
CO5: Design oleo strut used in landing gears.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1         
CO2        
CO3         
CO4        
CO5        

AE5712 PROJECT I
LTPC
0 063
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
It is intended to start the project work early in the seventh semester and carry out both design
and fabrication of required models or components whose working can be demonstrated. The
design is expected to be completed in the seventh semester and the fabrication and
demonstration will be carried out in the eighth semester.

AE5811 PROJECT II
L TPC
0 0 16 8
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
After the completion of design in the previous semester, the fabrication and demonstration will be
carried out in the eighth semester. Students are expected to conduct experiments and interpret
the data by plotting and analysing.
AE5001 AIRCRAFT RULES AND REGULATIONS - CAR I AND II LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
1. To acquaint students with airworthiness regulations and civil air worthiness requirements.
2. To familiarize students with analytical study of in- flight readings and engine reliability
programmes and aircraft maintenance programmes
3. To impart knowledge on procedures relating to registration of aircraft, issue and renewal of
air worthiness certificates to aircraft.
4. To acquaint students with aircraft maintenance engineer licensing procedures.
5. To make the students learn weight and balance control of an aircraft and material and
documents to be carried on board for Indian registered aircraft.

UNIT I C.A.R SERIES 'A' - PROCEDURE FOR CIVIL AIR 9

WORTHINESS REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITY
OPERATORS VIS-A-VIS AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTORATE
Responsibilities of operators / owners; Procedure of CAR issue, amendments etc., Objectives
and targets of airworthiness directorate; Airworthiness regulations and safety oversight of
engineering activities of operators. C.A.R. SERIES 'B' - ISSUE APPROVAL OF COCKPIT
CHECK LIST, MEL, CDL - Deficiency list (MEL & CDL); Preparation and use of cockpit check
list and emergency list.

UNIT II C.A.R. SERIES 'C' - DEFECT RECORDING, MONITORING, 9

INVESTIGATION AND REPORTING
Defect recording, reporting, investigation, rectification and analysis; Flight report; Reporting
and rectification of defects observed on aircraft; Analytical study of in-fight readings &
recordings; Maintenance control by reliability Method.
C.A.R. SERIES 'D' - AND AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE PROGRAMMES: Reliability
Programme (Engines); Aircraft maintenance programme& their approval; On condition
maintenance of reciprocating engines; TBO - Revision programme - Maintenance of fuel and
oil uplift and consumption records - Light aircraft engines; Fixing routine maintenance periods
and component TBOs - Initial & revisions.
UNIT III C.A.R. SERIES 'E' - APPROVAL OF ORGANISATIONS 9
Approval of organizations in categories A, B, C, D, E, F, & G; Requirements of infrastructure
at stations other than parent base. C.A.R. SERIES 'F' - AIR WORTHINESS AND
CONTINUED AIR WORTHINESS: Procedure relating to registration of aircraft; Procedure for
issue / revalidation of Type Certificate of aircraft and its engines / propeller; Issue /
revalidation of Certificate of Airworthiness; Requirements for renewal of Certificate of
Airworthiness.

UNIT IV C.A.R. SERIES 'L' - AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE ENGINEER – 9

LICENSING
Issue of AME Licence, its classification and experience requirements, Complete Series
'L'.C.A.R.SERIES 'M' MANDATORY MODIFICATIONS AND INSPECTIONS: Mandatory
Modifications / Inspections.

UNIT V C.A.R. SERIES 'T' - FLIGHT TESTING OF AIRCRAFT 9

Flight testing of (Series) aircraft for issue of C of A; Fight testing of aircraft for which C or A
had been previously issued. C.A.R. SERIES 'X' - MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS:
Registration Markings of aircraft; Weight and balance control of an aircraft; Provision of first
aid kits & Physician's kit in an aircraft; Use furnishing materials in an aircraft; Concessions;
Aircraft log books; Document to be carried on board on Indian registered aircraft; Procedure
for issue of taxy permit; Procedure for issue of type approval of aircraft components and
equipment including instruments.
 TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Acquire knowledge of Airworthiness requirements for transport, military, gliders and
micro light aircrafts.
CO2: Perform defect recording, reporting, investigation, rectification and analysis.
CO3: Acquire Knowledge of procedure for holding examinations, proficiency checks etc.
CO4: Perform procedure relating to registration of aircraft and fulfil the requirements for grant
of civil licenses.
CO5: Acquire Knowledge of Issue/validation and renewal of Certificate of Airworthiness and to
determine airworthiness of ageing aircraft.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1         
CO2         
CO3           
CO4        
CO5          

REFERENCES:
01. "Aircraft Manual (India) ", Volume - Latest Edition ,The English Book Store, 17-
1,Connaught Circus, New Delhi.(Old Edition 2003)
02. "Aeronautical Information Circulars (relating to Airworthiness) ", from DGCA. Advisory
Circulars ", form DGCA.
03. "Civil Aviation Requirements with latest Amendment (Section 2 Airworthiness) ",
Published by DGCA, The English Book Store, 17-1, Connaught Circus, New
Delhi.1993.

AE5002 ELEMENTS OF HEAT TRANSFER L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To impart knowledge to students in the fundamentals of conductive heat transfer both
steady and unsteady with practical examples.
02. To acquaint students with laminar and turbulent convective heat transfer analysis and its
application to heat exchanger.
03. To make students learn the basis of radiative heat transfer and its importance in thermal
radiation systems.
04. To make the students capable of obtaining numerical solutions of conductive convective
and radioactive heat transfer problems with finite difference methods.
05. To make students familiarize with aerospace heat transfer problem and numerical analysis
of such problems.

UNIT I CONDUCTION 9
Governing equation in Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical coordinates. 1-D steady state heat
conduction with and without heat generation. Composite wall- Electrical analogy – Critical
thickness of insulation – Heat transfer from extended surface – Effect of temperature on
conductivity- 1-D Transient analysis.
UNIT II CONVECTION 9
Review of basic equations of fluid flow – Dimensional analysis- Forced convection – Laminar
flow over flat plate and flow through pipes-Flow across tube banks. Turbulent flow over flat
plate and flow through pipes – Free convection – Heat transfer from vertical plate using
integral method – Empirical relations - Types of heat exchangers – Overall heat transfer
coefficient – LMTD and NTU methods of analysis.

UNIT III RADIATION 9

Basic definitions – Concept of black body - Laws of black body radiation-Radiation between
black surfaces – Radiation heat exchange between grey surfaces – Radiation shielding –
Shape factor-Electrical network analogy in thermal radiation systems.
UNIT IV NUMERICAL METHODS 9
1-D and 2-D steady and unsteady state heat conduction – composite walls-heat generation-
variable thermal conductivity- extended surfaces analysis using finite difference method-
Convective heat transfer- Stream function- vorticity method- Creeping flow analysis-
convection-diffusion 1-D, 2-D analysis using finite difference approximation. Numerical
methods applicable to radiation heat transfer.

UNIT V CASE STUDIES IN AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 9

Numerical treatment of heat transfer problems pertaining to Aerospace Engineering like in gas
turbines, rocket thrust chambers, Aerodynamic heating and Ablative heat transfer in thermal
protection systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Apply the basic concepts of heat conduction for engineering problems.
CO2: Distinguish between the basic differences pertaining to heat conduction and convection.
CO3: Acquire knowledge on the unique behaviour of heat transfer process by radiation.
CO4: Acquire skills to apply numerical methods for heat transfer solutions.
CO5: Apply the numerical methods as well as analytical methods for heat transfer problem
solutions.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1      
CO2       
CO3      
CO4       
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Sachdeva,S.C., Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer, NEW AGE
publishers,2010.
02. Yunus A. Cengel, Heat Transfer – A Practical Approach Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition,
2009.

REFERENCES:
01. NecatiOzisik, Finite Difference Method in Heat Transfer, CRC Press, 2nd edition, 2017.
02. Pradip Majumdar, Computational Methods for Heat & Mass Transfer, CRC Press, 2005.
03. YogeshJaluria, Kenneth E Torrence, Computational Heat transfer, CRC Press, 3 rd
Edition, 2017.
AE5003 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS
LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
01. Be able to understand the various experimental techniques involved for
measuring displacements, stresses, strains in structural components.
02. To familiarize with the different types of strain gages used.
03. To familiarize with the instrumentation system used for strain gauges.
04. Be able to use photo elasticity techniques and methods for stress analysis.
05. Be able to familiarize with the different NDT techniques.

UNIT I BASICS OF MECHANICAL MEASUREMENTS 9

Basic Characteristics and Requirements of a Measuring System – Principles of Measurements
– Precision, Accuracy, Sensitivity and Range of Measurements – Sources of Error – Statistical
Analysis of Experimental Data – Contact Type Mechanical Extensometers – Advantages and
Disadvantages – Examples of Non -Contact Measurement Techniques.

UNIT II ELECTRICAL-RESISTANCE STRAIN GAUGES 9

Strain Sensitivity in Metallic Alloys – Gage Construction – Gage Sensitivities and Gage Factor
– Corrections for Transverse Strain Effects – Performance Characteristics of Foil Strain Gages
– Materials Used for Strain Gauges – Environmental Effects – The Three-Element Rectangular
Rosette for Strain Measurement – Other Types of Strain Gages – Semiconductor Strain Gages
– Grid & Brittle Coating Methods of Strain Analysis.

UNIT III STRAIN-GAUGE CIRCUITS & INSTRUMENTATION 9

The Potentiometer Circuit and Its Application to Strain Measurement – Variations From Basic
Circuit –Circuit Output – The Wheatstone Bridge Circuit – Current and Constant Voltage
Circuits – Analog to Digital Conversion – Calibrating Strain-Gage Circuits – Effects of Lead
Wires and Switches – Electrical Noise -– Strain Measurement in Bars, Beams and Shafts –
Circuit Sensitivity & Circuit Efficiency.

UNIT IV PHOTOELASTIC METHODS OF STRESS ANALYSIS 9

Introduction to Photoelastic Methods – Stress-Optic Law – Effects of a Stressed Model in a
Plane Polariscope – Effects of a Stressed Model in a Circular Polariscope - Tardy
Compensation - Two-Dimensional Photoelastic Stress Analysis – Fringe Multiplication and
Fringe Sharpening - Materials for Two-Dimensional Photoelasticity - Properties and Calibration
of Commonly Employed Photoelastic Materials – Introduction to Three-Dimensional
Photoelasticity.

UNIT V NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING 9

Different types of NDT Techniques - Acoustic Emission Technique – Ultrasonics – Pulse-Echo
– Through Transmission – Eddy Current Testing – Magnetic Particle Inspection – X-Ray
Radiography – Challenges in Non-Destructive Evaluation – Non-Destructive Evaluation in
Composites – Image Processing Basics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Analyse the performance of measuring instrumentation.
CO2: Impart knowledge on different methods of strain measurement.
CO3: Design different strain gauge circuits.
CO4: Use photoelasticity for stress analysis.
CO5: Exposure the different types of non-destructive testing methods.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1       
CO2       
CO3      
CO4       
CO5       

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Dally, J.W., and Riley, W.F., Experimental Stress Analysis, McGraw Hill Inc., New York
1998.
02. Sadhu Singh, Experimental Stress Analysis, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2009.
03. Srinath, L.S., Raghava, M.R., Lingaiah, K., Garagesha, G., Pant B., and Ramachandra,
K., Experimental Stress Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1984.

REFERENCES:
01. Albert S. Kobayashi,' Handbook on Experimental Mechanics, Prentice Hall
Publishers,2008.
02. Durelli, A.J.Applied Stress Analysis, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 1970.
03. Hetenyi, M., Hand book of Experimental Stress Analysis, John Wiley and Sons Inc.,
New York, 1972.
04. James F. Doyle and James W. Phillips,'Manual on Experimental Stress Analysis', 5th
Edition, 1989.
05. Ramesh, K., Digital Photoelasticity, Springer, New York, 2000.

ME5452 MECHANICS OF MACHINES L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the principles in the formation of mechanisms and their kinematics.
2. To learn the basic concepts of toothed gearing and kinematics of gear trains.
3. To study the effect of friction in different machine elements.
4. To analyze the forces and torque acting on simple mechanical systems
5. To understand the importance of balancing and vibration.

UNIT I KINEMATIC ANALYSIS IN SIMPLE MECHANISMS AND CAMS 9

Mechanisms – Terminology and definitions – kinematics inversions and anlaysis of 4 bar and
slide crank chain – velocity and acceleration polygons – cams – classifications – displacement
diagrams - layout of plate cam profiles.

UNIT II TOOTHED GEARING AND GEAR TRAINS 9

Gear terminology – law of toothed gearing – involute gearing – Gear tooth action - Interference
and undercutting – gear trains – parallel axis gear trains – epicyclic gear trains.

UNIT III FRICTION ASPECTS IN MACHINE COMPONENTS 9

Surface contacts – Sliding and Rolling friction – Friction drives – Friction in screw threads –
Friction clutches – Belt drives – Friction aspects in brakes.

UNIT IV STATIC AND DYNAMIC FORCE ANALYSIS 9

Applied and Constrained Forces – Free body diagrams – Static equilibrium conditions – Static
Force analysis in simple mechanisms – Dynamic Force Analysis in simple machine members –
Inertia Forces and Inertia Torque – D’Alembert’s principle.
UNIT V BALANCING OF ROTATING MASSES AND VIBRATION 9
Static and Dynamic balancing – Balancing of revolving masses – Balancing machines – Free
vibrations – natural Frequency – Damped Vibration – bending critical speed of simple shaft –
Forced vibration – harmonic Forcing – Vibration isolation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Design the linkages and the cam mechanisms for specified output motions.
2. Determine the gear parameters of toothed gearing and speeds of gear trains in various
applications.
3. Evaluate the frictional torque in screw threads, clutches, brakes and belt drives.
4. Determine the forces on members of mechanisms during static and dynamic equilibrium
conditions.
5. Determine the balancing masses on rotating machineries and the natural frequencies of
free and forced vibratory systems.

TEXT BOOK
1. Uicker, J.J., Pennock G.R and Shigley, J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”, Oxford
University Press, 2017.

REFERENCES
1. Cleghorn. W. L., Nikolai Dechev, “Mechanisms of Machines”, Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Rao.J.S. and Dukkipati.R.V. “Mechanism and Machine Theory”, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., 2006.
3. Rattan, S.S, “Theory of Machines”, McGraw-Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2014.
4. Robert L. Norton, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2009.
5. Thomas Bevan, “The Theory of Machines”, Pearson Education Ltd., 2010.

AE5004 WIND ENGINEERING

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To introduce fundamental aspects of atmospheric air motions and different types of
terrain to students.
02. To make students familiarize with properties of atmospheric boundary layer and
turbulence effects in atmosphere on structures.
03. To make students knowledgeable on boundary layer separation effects, wake and
vortex formations and three-dimensional flow structures.
04. To acquaint students with wind loading analysis and different assessment methods.
05. To elucidate students with basic concepts of aero elastic phenomena and their
relevance to wind loaded structures.

UNIT I THE ATMOSPHERE 8

Atmospheric Circulation - Stability of atmospheres -definitions & implications - Effects of friction -
atmospheric motion - Local winds, Building codes, Terrains different types.
UNIT II ATMOSPHERIC BOUNDARY LAYER 9
Governing Equations - Mean velocity profiles, Power law, logarithmic law wind speeds,
Atmospheric Turbulence profiles - Spectral density function -. Length scale of turbulence,
.Roughness parameters simulation techniques in wind tunnels.

UNIT III BLUFF BODY AERODYNAMICS 10

Governing equations Boundary layers and separations - Wake and Vortex formation two
dimensional- Strouhal Numbers, Reynolds numbers - Separation and Reattachments -
Oscillatory Flow patterns, Vortex shedding flows -Time varying forces to Wind velocity in
turbulent flow - Structures in three dimensional.

UNIT IV WIND LOADING 9

Introduction, Analysis and synthesis. Loading coefficients, local & global coefficients pressure
shear stress coefficients, force and moment coefficients - Assessment methods- Quasi steady
method - Peak factor method - Extreme value method.

UNIT V AERO ELASTIC PHENOMENA: 9

Vortex shedding and lock in phenomena in turbulent flows, across wind galloping, wake
galloping, Torsional divergence, along wind galloping of circular cables, cross wind galloping of
circular dibble’s', Wind loads &. Turbulent effects on tall. Structure - Launch vehicles.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Design wind turbines for production of wind power on alternative energy source.
CO2: Carry out structural analysis of various industrial structural units which are subjected
to wind load.
CO3: Use the principles of atmospheric boundary layer in industrial aerodynamics and
separation and reattachment concepts of oscillatory flows.
CO4: Apply the effects of turbulent wind on tall structures.
CO5: Acquire knowledge in vortex shedding and lock in turbulent force.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1        
CO2         
CO3          
CO4        
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Emil Simiu & Robert H Scanlan, 'Wind effects of structures fundamentals and
applications to design; John Wiley & Sons INC New York, 3rd edition, 1996.

REFERENCES:
01. Cook N J, Design Guides to wind loading of buildings structures. Part I & II, Butterworths,
don, 1990.
02. Tom Lawson, “Building Aerodynamics”, Imperial College Press London, 1st edition, 2001.
AE5005 AIRCRAFT ENGINE REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01.To introduce fundamental aspects of piston engine maintenance and inspection procedures
to students
02.To acquaint students with damage assessment and balancing procedures of propeller
03.To impart knowledge on various tools requirements and testing procedures of piston engine
to students
04.To familiarize students with jet engine maintenance, component inspection and damage
criteria of engine components
05.To impart knowledge on overhaul procedures and condition monitoring of the engine at
various altitudes to students

UNIT I BASIC OF PISTON ENGINE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 9

Classification of piston engines - Principles of operation - Function of components - Materials
used - Details of starting the engines - carburetion and Fuel injection systems for small and
large engines - Ignition system components - spark plug detail - Engine operating conditions at
various altitudes – Engine power measurements – Classification of engine lubricants and fuels
– Induction, Exhaust and cooling system - Maintenance and inspection check to be carried out.
Inspection and maintenance and troubleshooting - Inspection of all engine components - Daily
and routine checks- Overhaul procedures - Compression testing of cylinders - Special
inspection schedules - Engine fuel, control and exhaust systems - Engine mount and super
charger - Checks and inspection procedures.

UNIT II PROPELLER INSPECTION AND REPAIR 9

Propeller theory - operation, construction assembly and installation -Pitch change mechanism-
Propeller axially system- Damage and repair criteria - General Inspection procedures - Checks
on constant speed propellers - Pitch setting, Propeller Balancing, Blade cuffs,
Governor/Propeller operating conditions – Damage and repair criteria.

UNIT III ENGINE INSPECTION, TESTING AND REPAIR 9

Symptoms of failure - Fault diagnostics - Case studies of different engine systems -
Rectification during testing equipments for overhaul: Tools and equipments requirements for
various checks and alignment during overhauling - Tools for inspection - Tools for safety and
for visual inspection - Methods and instruments for non destructive testing techniques -
Equipment for replacement of parts and their repair. Engine testing: Engine testing procedures
and schedule preparation - Online maintenance.

UNIT IV JET ENGINE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 9

Types of jet engines – Fundamental principles – Bearings and seals - Inlets - compressors-
turbines-exhaust section – classification and types of lubrication and fuels- Materials used -
Details of control, starting around running and operating procedures – Inspection and
Maintenance-permissible limits of damage and repair criteria of engine components- internal
inspection of engines- compressor washing- field balancing of compressor fans- Component
maintenance procedures - Systems maintenance procedures - use of instruments for online
maintenance - Special inspection procedures-Foreign Object Damage - Blade damage .

UNIT V ENGINE OVERHAUL AND TROUBLE SHOOTING 9

Engine Overhaul - Overhaul procedures - Inspections and cleaning of components - Repairs
schedules for overhaul - Balancing of Gas turbine components. Trouble Shooting: Procedures
for trouble shooting - Condition monitoring of the engine on ground and at altitude - engine
health monitoring and corrective methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1:Inspect and safely perform maintenance and troubleshooting on aircraft cabin atmospheric
control, ice and rain control, position and warning, fire protection, and fuel systems using
the manufacturer service manuals, acceptable industry practices and applicable
regulations.
CO2: Demonstrate a working knowledge and mechanical ability to inspect, maintain, service
and repair aircraft electrical, engine (piston and turbine), airframe structure, flight control,
hydraulic, pneumatic, fuel, navigation and instrument systems and other aircraft
components.
CO3: Identify, install, inspect, fabricate and repair aircraft sheet metal and synthetic material
structures.
CO4: Display proper behaviour reflecting satisfactory work habits and ethics to fulfil program
requirements and confidence to prepare for employment.
CO5: Gain insights in balancing and troubleshooting of gas turbine engine components.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1           
CO2           
CO3          
CO4        
CO5         

TEXT BOOK:
01. Kroes & Wild, "Aircraft Power plants ", 7th Edition - McGraw Hill, New York, 1994.

REFERENCES:
01. Turbomeca, "Gas Turbine Engines ", The English Book Store ", New Delhi, 1993.
02. United Technologies’ Pratt & Whitney, " The Aircraft Gas turbine Engine and its
Operation”, The English Book Store, New Delhi.

AE5006 BOUNDARY LAYER THEORY LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To acquaint students with the fundamental concepts in boundary layer flow and
with the governing equations of viscous flow
02. To make students familiarize with obtaining analytical solutions for low speed
viscous flow problems commonly found in engineering applications
03. To introduce the basic concepts in laminar boundary layer theory and its
applications in engineering to students
04. To elucidate students on the complex phenomenon in turbulent boundary layer
theory and turbulence modelling
05. To make students knowledgeable on the techniques used for boundary layer
control.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL EQUATIONS OF VISCOUS FLOW 9

Fundamental equations of viscous flow, Conservation of mass, Conservation of Momentum-
Navier-Stokes equations, Energy equation, Mathematical character of basic equations,
Dimensional parameters in viscous flow, Non - dimensionlisation the basic equations and
boundary conditions, vorticity considerations, creeping flow and boundary layer flow.
UNIT II SOLUTIONS OF VISCOUS FLOW EQUATIONS 9
Solutions of viscous flow equations, Couette flows, Hagen-Poisuelle flow, Flow between rotating
concentric cylinders, Combined Couette-Poiseuille Flow between parallel plates, Creeping
motion, Stokes solution for an immersed sphere, Development of boundary layer, Displacement
thickness, momentum and energy thickness.

UNIT III LAMINAR BOUNDARY LAYER 9

Laminar boundary layer equations, Flat plate Integral analysis of Karman – Integral analysis of
energy equation – Laminar boundary layer equations – boundary layer over a curved body-Flow
separation- similarity solutions, Blasius solution for flat-plate flow, Falkner–Skan wedge flows,
Boundary layer temperature profiles for constant plate temperature –Reynold’s analogy –
Pohlhausen method.

UNIT IV TURBULENT BOUNDARY LAYER 9

Turbulence-physical and mathematical description, Two-dimensional turbulent boundary layer
equations –– Velocity profiles – The law of the wall – The law of the wake – Turbulent flow in
pipes and channels – Turbulent boundary layer on a flat plate – Boundary layers with pressure
gradient, Eddy Viscosity and mixing length.

UNIT V BOUNDARY LAYER CONTROL 9

Boundary layer control in laminar flow-Methods of Boundary layer control: Acceleration of the
boundary layer-Suction- Injection of a different gas-Prevention of transition - Cooling of the wall-
Boundary layer suction- Practical examples of Boundary Layer Control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Use fundamental equations of the viscous flow for practical examples.
CO2: Solve viscous flow problems for solutions.
CO3: Appreciate the importance of viscosity and shear flow adjacent to the airframe
of the aerospace vehicles.
CO4: Gain knowledge on the laminar boundary layer concepts and solution methods.
CO5: Gain insights on the importance of turbulence boundary layer in an aerospace
engineering problem.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1         
CO2         
CO3         
CO4         
CO5         

TEXT BOOKS:
1. White, F. M., Viscous Fluid Flow, McGraw-Hill Education; 3rd edition, 2005.

REFERENCES:
1. Reynolds, A, J., Turbulent Flows Engineering, John Wiley and Sons, 1980.
2. Schlichting, H., Boundary Layer Theory, Springer publishers, 8th edition, 2000.
AE5007 DESIGN OF GAS TURBINE ENGINE COMPONENTS LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To introduce basic design concepts of jet engine and estimation of required
thrust to students.
02. To make students familiarize with the design parameter and off design
calculations.
03. To give the students adequate exposure to design procedure to the rotating
components of engine such as compressor and turbine along with staging.
04. To make the students learn the aspects of combustion processes, flame
stabilization issue, igniters design and NOx controls.
05. To make students familiarize with the concept of design inlet and nozzle for
various on - off design conditions.

UNIT I GAS TURBINE ENGINE DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS 9

Design Process- compressible flow relationship; Constraint Analysis - Concept-Design tools-
preliminary estimates; Mission analysis - Aircraft weight and fuel consumption data-Example
problems on Constrain analysis, Mission analysis.

UNIT II ON DESIGN AND OFF-DESING PARAMETRIC ANALYSIS 9

Total and static properties-corrected mass flow rate-Engine Cycle Design- One-Dimensional
Through flow Area-Flow path force on components- aircraft constraint analysis, aircraft mission
analysis, engine parametric (design point) analysis, engine performance (off-design) analysis,
engine installation drag and sizing.

UNIT III DESIGN OF ROTATING COMPONENTS 9

Fan and Compressor Aerodynamics-Diffusion factor-Aerofoil geometry-Flow path dimension-
Radial variation-Turbine Aerodynamics- Constant axial velocity-adiabatic-selected Mach
number-Mean line stage Design-stage pressure ratio-Airfoil geometry-radial variation-turbine
cooling-range of turbine parameters-Engine life-Design Example –for fan-compressor-turbine.

UNIT IV COMBUSTION CHAMBER DESIGN 9

Design: Combustion system components- Combustion- Chemical reactor theory. Combustor
Stability map-Stirring and mixing-Total pressure loss-Fuels-Ignition-Combustion Systems of
Main Burner Design: Air partitioning- Main burner component Design: Diffuser-types of burner-
inner and outer casing design-Fuel nozzle-Dome and liner-Primary zone- swirler-Secondary
holes-Dilution holes-Transition duct-Design of Afterburners-Design parameters-Diffuser-Fuel
injection-Ignition-Flame stabilization – Flame spread and after burner length – Examples design
calculation.

UNIT V INLET AND NOZZLE DESIGN 9

Inlets and Exhaust Nozzles Design: Elements of a Successful Inlet-Engine Integration
Program-Definition of Subsonic Inlet-Engine Operational Requirements- Definition of
Supersonic Inlet-Engine Operational Requirements- Engine Impact on Inlet Design- Inlet
Impact on Engine Design-Validation of Inlet-Engine System-Exhaust nozzle design-Nozzle
types and their design -Jet control methods for reduction of infrared signature.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Do preliminary weight and fuel estimation for an aircraft mission.
CO2: Identify variation in parametric analysis of ON and OFF design calculations.
CO3: Explain the principle design of compressor and turbine and selection of suitable
materials.
 CO4: Estimate the total pressure losses and able to predict ignition delay.
CO5: Determine the basic design factors affects ON and OFF design operation of
inlets and nozzle on engine performance.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1         
CO2       
CO3         
CO4       
CO5       

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Mattingly J.D., Heiser, W.H. and Pratt D.T, 'Aircraft Engine Design', 2nd Edition, AIAA
Education Series, AIAA, 2002.
02. Oates G.C.,' Aircraft Propulsion Systems Technology and Design',1989, AIAA
Education Series.
03. Saravanamuttoo H.I.H and Rogers, G.F.C. “Gas Turbine Technology”, Pearson
Education Canada; 6th edition, 2008.

REFERENCES:
01. Cumpsty N., “Jet Propulsion: A Simple Guide to the Aerodynamics and
Thermodynamics Design and Performance of Jet Engines” , Cambridge University
Press; 2nd edition, 2003
02. Murthy S.N. and Curran E.T.,' High-Speed Flight Propulsion Systems', Volume 137,
Progress in Astronautics and Aeronautics, AIAA,1991.
03. Rathakrishnan E, 'Applied Gas Dynamics, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt Ltd, 2010.
Treage
Inc. I.E, Aircraft Gas Turbine Engine Technology, 3rd edition, Glencoe McGraw-Hill,
1995
04. Treage I.E, Aircraft Gas Turbine Engine Technology, 3rd edition, Glencoe McGraw-Hill,
Inc. 1995

ME5251 MANUFACTURING PROCESSES L T P C

3 0 0 3

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. Applying the working principles of various metal casting processes.
2. Applying the working principles of various metal joining processes.
3. Analyzing the working principles of bulk deformation of metals.
4. Applying the working principles of sheet metal forming process.
5. Applying the working principles of plastics molding.

UNIT I METAL CASTING PROCESSES 9

Sand Casting – Sand Mould – Type of patterns - Pattern Materials – Pattern allowances –
Molding sand Properties and testing – Cores –Types and applications – Molding machines –
Types and applications– Melting furnaces – Principle of special casting processes- Shell,
investment – Ceramic mould – Pressure die casting – Centrifugal Casting - CO casting - Defects
in Sand casting process – Stir casting - Defects in Sand casting.
UNIT II METAL JOINING PROCESSES 9
Fusion welding processes – Type of Gas welding – Flame characteristics – Filler and Flux
materials – Arc welding, Electrodes, Coating and specifications – Principles and types of
Resistance welding – Gas metal arc welding – Submerged arc welding – Electro slag welding –
Gas Tungsten arc welding – Principle and application of special welding processes – Plasma
arc welding – Thermit Welding – Electron beam welding – Friction welding – Friction stir welding
– Diffusion welding – Weld defects – Brazing and soldering – methods and process capabilities
– Adhesive bonding, Types and application

UNIT III BULK DEFORMATION PROCESSES 9

Hot working and cold working of metals – Forging processes – Open, impression and closed die
forging – Characteristics of the processes – Typical forging operations – rolling of metals –
Types of Rolling – Flat strip rolling – shape rolling operations – Defects in rolled parts – Principle
of rod and wire drawing – Tube drawing – Principles of Extrusion – Types – Hot and Cold
extrusion.

UNIT IV SHEET METAL PROCESSES 9

Sheet metal characteristics – Typical shearing, bending and drawing operations – Stretch
forming operations – Formability of sheet metal – Test methods –special forming processes -
Working principle and applications – Hydro forming – Rubber pad forming – Metal spinning –
Introduction of Explosive forming, magnetic pulse forming, peen forming, Super plastic forming –
Micro forming – Incremental forming.

UNIT V MANUFACTURE OF PLASTIC COMPONENTS 9

Types and characteristics of plastics – Molding of thermoplastics – working principles and typical
applications – injection molding – Plunger and screw machines – Compression molding,
Transfer Molding – Typical industrial applications – introduction to blow molding – Rotational
molding – Film blowing – Extrusion – Thermoforming – Bonding of Thermoplastics.
TOTAL = 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Apply the working principles of various metal casting processes.
2. Apply the working principles of various metal joining processes.
3. Analyze the working principles of bulk deformation of metals.
4. Apply the working principles of sheet metal forming process.
5. Apply the working principles of plastics molding.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kalpakjian. S, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Pearson Education India
Edition, 2006.
2. Roy. A. Lindberg, Processes and materials of manufacture, PHI / Pearson education, 2006.

REFERENCES:
1. Gowri.S, P. Hariharan, A.SureshBabu, Manufacturing Technology I, Pearson Education,
2008.
2. HajraChouldhary S.K. and Hajra Choudhury. A. K., Elements of Workshop Technology,
Volume I and II, Media Promoters and Publishers Private Limited, Mumbai, 1997.
3. Paul Degarma E., Black J.T. and Ronald A. Kosher, Materials and Processes, in
Manufacturing, Eight Edition,Prentice Hall of India, 1997.
4. Rao. P. N., Manufacturing Technology Foundry, Forming and Welding, 2ndEd.Tata McGraw
Hill, 2003.
5. Sharma, P.C., A Textbook of Production Technology, S.Chand and Co. Ltd., 2004.
 PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 0.9 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.3
2 0.9 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.3
3 0.9 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.3
4 0.9 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.3
5 0.9 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.3

AE5008 THEORY OF ELASTICITY

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
01. To improve the ability to use the principles of theory of elasticity in engineering
problems.
02. To analyze some real problem and to formulate the conditions of theory of
elasticity application.
03. To familiarize with the stress function approach in solving linear elasticity
problems.
04. To execute a reasonable choice of parameters of the model (geometry, material
properties, and boundary conditions).
05. To provide the foundation for pursuing other solid mechanics courses such as
theory of plates and shells, elastic stability, composite structures and fracture
mechanics.

UNIT I BASIC EQUATIONS OF ELASTICITY 9

Definition of Stress and Strain: Stress - Strain relationships - Equations of Equilibrium,
Compatibility equations, Boundary Conditions, Saint Venant’s principle - Principal Stresses,
Stress Ellipsoid - Stress invariants.

UNIT II PLANE STRESS AND PLANE STRAIN PROBLEMS 9

Airy’s stress function, Bi-harmonic equations, Polynomial solutions, Simple two dimensional
problems in Cartesian coordinates like bending of cantilever and simply supported beams.

UNIT III POLAR COORDINATES 9

Equations of equilibrium, Strain - displacement relations, Stress – strain relations, Airy’s stress
function, Axi – symmetric problems, Introduction to Dunder’s table, Curved beam analysis,
Lame’s, Kirsch, Michell’s and Boussinesque problems – Rotating discs.

UNIT IV TORSION 9
Navier’s theory, St. Venant’s theory, Prandtl’s theory on torsion, semi- inverse method and
applications to shafts of circular, elliptical, equilateral triangular and rectangular sections.
Membrane Analogy.

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO THEORY OF PLATES AND SHELLS 9

Classical plate theory – Assumptions – Governing equations – Boundary conditions – Navier’s
method of solution for simply supported rectangular plates – Levy’s method of solution for
rectangular plates under different boundary conditions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: have knowledge on the difference between Strength of Materials approach and
Theory of Elasticity
CO2: Exhibit better understanding on the strain-displacement relation, stress-strain
relations and stress ellipsoid
CO3: Demonstrate the knowledge on the classification of 2-D problems and the methods
of solution.
CO4: Formulate of governing equations and solution for torsion of non-circular sections.
CO5: Solve the governing equation for plate bending.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1       
CO2       
CO3       
CO4       
CO5       

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Ansel C Ugural and Saul K Fenster, ‘Advanced Strength and Applied Elasticity’, 4th
Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey,4th edition 2003.
02. Bhaskar, K., and Varadan, T. K., Theory of Isotropic/Orthotropic Elasticity, CRC Press
USA, 2009.
03. Timoshenko, S.P, and Goodier, T.N., Theory of Elasticity, McGraw – Hill Ltd., Tokyo,
1990.

REFERENCES:
01. Barber, J. R., Elasticity (Solid Mechanics and Its Applications), Springer publishers, 3rd
edition, 2010.
02. Sokolnikoff, I. S., Mathematical Theory of Elasticity, McGraw – Hill, New York, 1978.
03. Volterra& J.H. Caines, Advanced Strength of Materials, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1991.
04. Wang, C. T., Applied Elasticity, McGraw – Hill Co., New York, 1993.

AE5009 ADVANCED AEROSPACE MATERIALS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To impart knowledge to students on the mechanical behaviour of various
materials that are used in aircraft and it characteristics.
02. To familiarize with the high performance alloys used in aerospace
applications.
03. To gain knowledge of the various high temperature materials and their
characterisation methods.
04. To gain knowledge of the various thermal protection systems and coatings.
05. To familiarize with the smart materials used for aerospace applications.
UNIT I MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR 9
Properties of Conventional Aircraft Materials – Linear and Non-Linear Behaviour – Yielding,
Strain Hardening and Fracture – Design for Strength – General Requirements of Materials
for Aerospace Applications – Principles of Stressed Skin Construction – Effect of
Manufacturing Procedures on Material Behaviour – Micro-structural Influence of Mechanical
Behaviour.

UNIT II HIGH PERFORMANCE ALLOYS 9

High Performance Alloys For Aerospace Application – Aluminium, Magnesium, and Titanium
alloys – Comparison of Properties – Steel Quality & Effect of Carbon Content – Effect of
Alloying & Heat Treatments – Properties of Advanced Alloys used in Aircraft – Effect of
Corrosion on Mechanical properties – Stress Corrosion Cracking – Corrosion Resistance
Materials – Heat Resistance Alloys – Effect of Alloying Elements & Ideal Percentage
Composition.

UNIT III HIGH TEMPERATURE MATERIALS 9

Carbon/Carbon composites – Properties & Advantages – Fabrication Processes – Metal
Matrix Composites – Mechanical Properties – Mechanical and Thermal Properties of
Materials at Elevated Temperatures – Super Alloys – Ceramic Material Systems and Their
Properties – Fabrication of Ceramic Composites – Cermet Tools – Application of These
Materials in The Thermal Protection Systems of Aerospace Vehicles – Application of High
Temperature Materials in an Aircraft.

UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION OF MATERIAL STRUCTURE 9

X-Ray Diffraction And Their Applications – Absorption of X-rays and filters - X-ray –
Diffraction Directions - Working Principles of Transmission Electron Microscopes – Image
Formation – Resolving Power – Magnification & Depth of Focus – Advanced Chemical and
Thermal analysis – Basic Principles & Practice – Augur Spectroscopy – Differential Thermal
Analysis.

UNIT V SMART MATERIALS FOR AEROSPACE APPLICATION 9

Fundamentals of Piezoelectricity – Soft and Hard Piezoelectric Ceramics – Basic
Piezoceramic Characteristics – Shape Memory Alloys - Fundamentals of Shape Memory
Alloy (SMA) Behavior – Phase Transformation – Lattice Structure and Deformation
Mechanism – Origin of the One-Way Shape Memory Effect – Stress Induced Martensite and
Pseudoelasticity – Two-Way Shape Memory Effect.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Demonstrate the mechanical behaviour of materials and ability to compare
material performance.
CO2: Suggest suitable material for specific applications.
CO3: Investigate the influence of process parameters on material behaviour.
CO4: Impart Knowledge on the state of the art techniques in material
characterization.
CO5: Explain the physical understanding of piezoelectric and SMA behaviour.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1      
CO2      
CO3      
CO4      
CO5      

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Adrian Mouritz,’AIAA Education Series – Introduction to Aerospace Materials, 2012.
02. Titterton.G., Aircraft Materials and Processes, V Edition, Pitman Publishing Co.,
1995.

REFERENCES:
01. Martin, J.W., Engineering Materials, Their properties and Applications, Wykedham
Publications (London) Ltd., 1987.
02. Prasad, N. Eswara, Wanhill, R. J. H Aerospace Materials and Material
Technologies – Indian Institute of Metals Series, 2017.
03. Raghavan.V., Materials Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
5th edition, 2004.
04. Sam Zhang, ‘Aerospace Materials Handbook (Advances in Materials Science and
Engineering) 1st Edition, 2016.
05. Van Vlack.L.H., Elements of Materials Science and Engineering Prentice Hall;
publishers, 6th edition, 1989

AE5010 AIRCRAFT DESIGN LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To familiarise with the various configurations of airplanes.
02. To familiarise with selection of proper power plant.
03. To gain knowledge in performance parameters of airplanes.
04. To expose the students with optimization of wing loading.
05. To impart knowledge in structural design of airplanes.

UNIT I REVIEW OF DEVELOPMENTS IN AIRPLANES 9

Categories and types of aircrafts – various configurations – Layouts and their relative merits
– strength, stiffness, fail safe and fatigue requirements – Maneuvering load factors – Gust
and maneuverability envelopes – Balancing and maneuvering loads on tail planes.

UNIT II POWER PLANT TYPES AND CHARACTERISTICS 9

Selection of power plants, Characteristics of different types of power plants – Propeller
characteristics and selection – Relative merits of location of power plant.

UNIT III PRELIMINARY DESIGN 9

Selection of geometric and aerodynamic parameters – Weight estimation and balance
diagram – Drag estimation of complete aircraft – Level flight, climb, takeoff and landing
calculations – range and endurance – static and dynamic stability estimates – control
requirements.
UNIT IV SPECIAL PROBLEMS 9
Layout peculiarities of subsonic and supersonic aircraft – optimization of wing loading to
achieve desired performance – loads on undercarriages and design requirements.

UNIT V STRUCTURAL DESIGN 9

Estimation of loads on complete aircraft and components – Structural design of fuselage,
wings and undercarriages, controls, connections and joints. Materials for modern aircraft –
Methods of analysis, testing and fabrication.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to

CO1: Select proper airplane configuration for their design.
CO2: Install the power plant in proper location to generate required thrust.
CO3: Estimate complete performance and stability parameter such as range,
endurance, static margin, centre of gravity of airplane etc.
CO4: Carry out design of wing and fuselage.
CO5: Demonstrate complete design procedure for an airplane.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1         
CO2         
CO3         
CO4        
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
01. D.P. Raymer, “Aircraft conceptual design”, AIAA Series, 1988
02. Mohammad H. Sadraey, “Aircraft Design a Systems Engineering Approach”, A John
Wiley & Sons, Ltd., Publication, 1st edition. 2013.

REFERENCES:
01. G. Corning, “Supersonic & Subsonic Airplane Design”, II Edition, Edwards Brothers
Inc.,Michigan, 1953.
02. E.F. Bruhn, “Analysis and Design of Flight Vehicle Structures”, Tristate Offset Co.,
U.S.A., 1980.
03. E. Torenbeek, “Synthesis of Subsonic Airplane Design”, Delft University Press,
London, 1976.
04. H.N.Kota, Integrated design approach to Design fly by wire” Lecture notes Interline
Pub. Bangalore, 1992.
AE5011 FUNDAMENTALS OF CONTROL ENGINEERING
LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To introduce the mathematical modelling of systems, open loop and closed
loop systems and analyses in time domain and frequency domain.
02. To introduce sampled data control system.
03. To impart the knowledge on the concept of stability.
04. To impart knowledge on the various methods to analyze stability in both time
and frequency domain.
05. To introduce state models for linear continuous time systems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Historical review, Simple pneumatic, hydraulic and thermal systems, Series and parallel
system, Analogies, mechanical and electrical components, Development of flight control
systems.

UNIT II OPEN AND CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS 9

Feedback control systems – Control system components - Block diagram representation of
control systems, Reduction of block diagrams, Signal flow graphs, Output to input ratios.

UNIT III CHARACTERISTIC EQUATION AND FUNCTIONS 9

Response of systems to different inputs viz., Step impulse, pulse, parabolic and sinusoidal
inputs, Time response of first and second order systems, steady state errors and error
constants of unity feedback circuit.

UNIT IV CONCEPT OF STABILITY 9

Necessary and sufficient conditions, Routh-Hurwitz criteria of stability, Root locus and Bode
techniques, Concept and construction, frequency response.

UNIT V STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9

Introduction – Concepts of state, state variables and state model – State models for linear
continuous time systems – Solution of state equations – Applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: The characteristics, uses and limitations of classical and modern feedback
control methods.
CO2: Acquire knowledge on open and closed loop systems.
CO3: Distinguish between the responses of different order systems for various step
inputs.
CO4: Apply the concepts of time response and frequency responses for the
practical systems.
CO5: Acquire in-depth knowledge of PID control and state-space representation.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1      
CO2      
CO3      
CO4      
CO5      

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Kuo, B.C. Automatic control systems, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2017.
02. Naresh K Sinha, Control Systems, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi,
2008.

REFERENCES:
01. Nagrath I.J & Gopal M Control System Engineering, New Age International
Publishers, 4th Edition, 2006.
02. OGATO, Modern Control Engineering, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 5th
Edition, 2010.

AE5012 THEORY OF VIBRATION

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To impart knowledge on the fundamentals of Vibration Theory.
02. To do mathematically model for real-world mechanical vibration problems.
03. To familiarize with the multi degree of freedom systems.
04. To impart knowledge to obtain a complete solution to mechanical vibration
problems using mathematical or numerical techniques.
05. To familiarize with the different aeroelastic problems.

UNIT I SINGLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS 9

Introduction to simple harmonic motion, D’Alembert’s Principle, Free vibrations – Damped
vibrations – Forced Vibrations, with and without damping – support excitation –
Transmissibility - Vibration measuring instruments.

UNIT II MULTI DEGREES OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS 9

Two degrees of freedom systems - Static and Dynamic couplings - vibration absorber-
Principal co-ordinates - Principal modes and orthogonal conditions - Eigen value problems -
Hamilton’s principle - Lagrangean equations and application.

UNIT III CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 9

Vibration of elastic bodies - Vibration of strings – Longitudinal, Lateral and Torsional
vibrations
UNIT IV APPROXIMATE METHODS 9
Approximate methods - Rayleigh’s method - Dunkerley’s method – Rayleigh-Ritz method,
Matrix Iteration method.

UNIT V ELEMENTS OF AEROELASTICITY 9

Coupled flexural–Torsional oscillation of beam- Aeroelastic problems - Collars triangle -
Wing Divergence - Aileron Control reversal – Flutter – Buffeting. – Elements of servo
elasticity.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to

CO1: Solve problems in free, free damped and forced vibration characteristics of
single degree of freedom systems.
CO2: Analyse the vibration characteristic of multi degree of freedom systems
including orthogonality conditions.
CO3: Analyse the vibration characteristics of continuous system such as strings,
bar, shafts and beams.
CO4: Calculate the fundamental frequency of multi degree of freedom systems
using approximate methods.
CO5: Investigate the aero elastic effects of 2D wing.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1        
CO2        
CO3        
CO4        
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Grover, G.K. “Mechanical Vibrations”, 7th Edition, Nem Chand Brothers, Roorkee,
India, 2009.
02. Leonard Meirovitch, ‘Elements of Vibration Analysis’ – McGraw Hill International
Edition, 2007.
03. William T. Thomson & Marie Dillon Dahleh, ‘Theory of Vibration with Application”,
Prentice Hall publishers, 5th edition, 1997.

REFERENCES:
01. Bisplinghoff R.L., Ashely H and Hogman R.L., Aero elasticity – Addison Wesley
Publication, New York, 1983.
02. Den Hartog, ‘Mechanical Vibrations’ Crastre Press, 2008.
03. TSE. F.S., Morse, I.F., Hinkle, R.T., ‘Mechanical Vibrations’ – Prentice Hall, New
York, 1984.
04. William Weaver, Stephen P. Timoshenko, Donovan H. Young, Donovan H.
Young.‘Vibration Problems in Engineering’ – John Wiley and Sons, New York, 200.
05. William W Seto, ‘Mechanical Vibrations’ – McGraw Hill, Schaum Series, 1964.
AE5013 PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS OF TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT
LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To learn about the evolution and the basic concepts of quality.
02. To understand the various principles, practices of TQM to achieve quality.
03. To learn the various statistical approaches for Quality control.
04. To understand the TQM tools for continuous process improvement.
05. To learn the importance of ISO and Quality systems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction – Need for quality – Evolution of quality – Definition of quality – Dimensions of
product and service quality – Basic concepts of TQM – TQM Framework – Barriers to TQM
Contributions of Quality Gurus ––Deming’s 14 point principles – Crosby’s 14 point principles
– Juran Triology.

UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Quality statements – Customer focus –Customer orientation, Customer satisfaction,
Customer complaints, Customer retention – Continuous process improvement – PDCA cycle,
5s, Kaizen –Supplier partnership – Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating.

UNIT III TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9

The seven traditional tools of quality- Histogram – Pareto diagram – Cause and effect
diagram – Flow charts –Check sheet – Scatter diagram – Quality control charts – The seven
new tools of quality – Why-why analysis – Affinity diagram – Interrelationship digraph – Tree
diagram – Prioritization matrix – Process decision program chart – Activity network diagram.

UNIT IV TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9

Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) – Taguchi methodology – Total
Productive Maintenance –Concepts – Business Process Reengineering – Six-sigma –
Concepts – case studies – Bench marking –– Failure Mode and Effect Analysis – Stages,
Types.

UNIT V QUALITY SYSTEMS 9

Need for ISO 9000- ISO 9000-2000 Quality System – Elements, Documentation, Quality
auditing QS 9000 – ISO 14000 – Concepts, Requirements and Benefits –Quality Council –
Leadership, Employee involvement – Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork,
Recognition and Reward.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Apply basic concepts of quality gurus.
CO2: Gain and apply the knowledge of TQM principles.
CO3: Identify the appropriate the statistical tool to achieve the quality control.
CO4: Employ the principles of continuous process improvement tools.
CO5: Gain and apply the knowledge of quality systems.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO1 PO1
0 1 2
CO1        
CO2        
CO3        
CO4        
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Dale H.Besterfield Carol Besterfield-Michna, Glen H.Besterfield, Mary Besterfied-
Sacre, Hemant Urdhwareshe, Rashmi Urdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management,
Pearson Publications, 3rd Edition, 2003.
02. Oakland, J.S. “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, 3rd
Edition, 2003.

REFERENCES:
01. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, “The Management and Control of Quality”,
6th Edition, South-Western (Thomson Learning), 2005.
02. Janakiraman,B and Gopal, R.K, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”,
Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
03. Chapman and Hall, “Total Quality Management”, 2nd Edition, 1995.
04. Mukherjee,P.N “Total Quality Management”, Prentice- Hall iof India Private Limited,
2006.
05. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India)
Pvt. Ltd., 2006.

AE5014 AIRFRAME REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE LTPC

3 003

COURSE OBJECTIVES:Of this course are

01. To familiarise with various types of airframe repairs and inspection
procedures.
02. To impart knowledge on the materials used for airframe components.
03. To assembly and disassembling of airframe components.
04. To familiarise with the hydraulic and pneumatic components of airplanes.
05. To make the students understand safety procedure followed for repairing of
airplanes.

UNIT I WELDING IN AIRCRAFT STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS 9

Equipments used in welding shop and their maintenance - Ensuring quality welds - Welding
jigs and fixtures - Soldering and brazing.
Sheet Metal Repair and Maintenance: Selection of materials; Repair schemes; Fabrication of
replacement patches; Tools - power/hand; Repair techniques; Close tolerance fasteners;
Sealing compounds; forming/shaping; Calculation of weight of completed repair; Effect of
weight - change on surrounding structure. Sheet metal inspection - N.D.T. Testing. Riveted
repair design - Damage investigation - Reverse engineering.
UNIT II PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES IN AIRCRAFT 9
Plastics in Aircraft: Review of types of plastics used in airplanes - Maintenance and repair of
plastic components - Repair of cracks, holes etc., and various repairs schemes - Scopes.
Advanced Composites in Aircraft:

Cleaning of fibre reinforced plastic (FRP) materials prior to repair; Break test - Repair
Schemes; FRP/honeycomb sandwich materials; laminated FRP structural members and skin
panels; Tools/equipment; Vacuum-bag process. Special precautions – Autoclaves.

UNIT III AIRCRAFT JACKING, ASSEMBLY AND RIGGING 9

Airplane jacking and weighing and C.G. Location. Balancing of control surfaces - Inspection
maintenance. Helicopter flight controls. Tracking and balancing of main rotor.

UNIT IV REVIEW OF HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEM 9

Trouble shooting and maintenance practices - Service and inspection - Inspection and
maintenance of landing gear systems. - Inspection and maintenance of air-conditioning and
pressurization system, water and waste system. Installation and maintenance of Instruments
- handling - Testing - Inspection. Inspection and maintenance of auxiliary systems - Fire
protection systems - Ice protection system - Rain removal system -Position and warning
system - Auxiliary Power Units (APUs).

UNIT V SAFETY PRACTICES 9

Hazardous materials storage and handling, Aircraft furnishing practices - shooting. Theory and
practices. Equipments.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Identify and apply the principles of function and safe operation to aircraft as per FAA.
CO2: Demonstrate the general airframe structural repairs, the structural repair manual and
structural control programme.
CO3: Perform airframe structural component inspection, corrosion repair and non-destructive
inspection.
CO4: Do aircraft component disassembly, reassembly and troubleshooting.
CO5:Acquire knowledge on aircraft adhesives, sealants, bonding techniques, repair
procedures and the types and detection of defects in aircraft composite materials,
Identify, install, inspect, fabricate and repair aircraft sheet metal and synthetic, material
structures.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1         
CO2         
CO3        
CO4         
CO5         
TEXT BOOKS:
01. Kroes, Watkins, Delp, "Aircraft Maintenance and Repair ", McGraw Hill, New York, 7th
Edition, 2013.
REFERENCES:
01. Brimm D.J. Bogges H.E., "Aircraft Maintenance ", Pitman Publishing corp., NewYork,
2009.
02. Delp. Bent and Mckinely “Aircraft Maintenance Repair”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1987.
03. Larry Reithmeir, “Aircraft Repair Manual ", Palamar Books, Marquette, 1992.
AE5015 AERO ELASTICITY LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
1. Explain structural concepts such as elastic stiffness, inertia, influence coefficients, elastic
axis, and shear center.
2. Describe structural dynamics of wings, including bending and torsion modes of
vibration and their associated natural frequencies.
3. Apply aeroelastic concepts of divergence, flutter, lift and roll effectiveness, aileron
reversal, and mode coalescence.
4. Knowledge to formulate and derive static and dynamic aeroelastic equations of motion.
5. To Apply Rayleigh-Ritz Method for Approximate continuous aeroelastic systems able to
Interpret velocity-damping and velocity-frequency flutter diagrams.

UNIT I AERO ELASTICITY PHENOMENA 9

Vibration of beams due to coupling between bending and torsion - The aero-elastic triangle of
forces - Stability versus response problems – Aeroelasticity in Aircraft Design – Vortex
induced vibration – Introduction to aero servo elasticity.

UNIT II DIVERGENCE OF A LIFTING SURFACE 9

Simple two dimensional idealizations – Strip theory – Fredholm integral equation of the
second kind – Exact solutions for simple rectangular wings – Semi rigid assumption and
approximate solutions – Generalized coordinates – Successive approximations – Numerical
approximations using matrix equations.

UNIT III STEADY STATE AEROELASTIC PROBLEMS 9

Loss and reversal of aileron control – Critical aileron reversal speed – Aileron efficiency –
Semi rigid theory and successive approximations – Lift distributions – Rigid and elastic wings.
UNIT IV FLUTTER ANALYSIS 9
Non-dimensional parameters – Stiffness criteria Dynamic mass balancing – Model
experiments – Dimensional similarity – Flutter analysis – Two dimensional thin airfoils in
steady incompressible flow – Quasi steady aerodynamic derivatives – Galerkin’s method for
critical speed – Stability of distributed motion – Torsion flexure flutter – Solution of the flutter
determinant – Methods of determining the critical flutter speeds – Flutter prevention and
control.

UNIT V EXAMPLES OF AEROELASTIC PROBLEMS 9

Galloping of transmission lines and flow induced vibrations of tall slender structures and
suspension bridges – Aircraft wing flutter- Vibrational problems in Helicopters.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Investigate the different aero elastic phenomenon and the methods of
counteracting it.
CO2: Explain how the aeroelastic phenomena flutter, divergence and aileron
reversal arise and how they affect aircraft performance.
CO3: Formulate aeroelastic equations of motion and use them to derive
fundamental relations for aeroelastic analysis.
CO4: Perform a preliminary aeroelastic analysis of a slender wing structure in low-
speed airflow, and explain under what circumstances an aeroelastic analysis
can be expected to produce useful results.
CO5: Estimate the critical divergence, reversal and flutter speeds of an airplane and
to investigate the stability of the disturbed motion.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1     
CO2     
CO3     
CO4     
CO5     

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Fung, Y.C. An Introduction to the theory of Aeroelasticity, Dover Publications Inc.,
2008.

REFERENCES:
01. Bisplinghoff., R.L. Ashley, H., and Halfman, R.L, “Aeroelasticity” Addison Wesley
Publishing Co., Inc. II ed. 1996.
02. Broadbent, E.G., Elementary Theory of Aeroelasticity, Bunhill Publications Ltd, 1986.
03. Blevins R.D, “Flow induced vibrations”, Krieger Pub Co; 2 Reprint editions, 2001.
04. Scanlan, R.H. and Rosenbaum, R., Introduction to the Study of Aircraft Vibration and
Flutter, Macmillan Co., N.Y., 1991.

AE5016 MISSILE AERODYNAMICS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To introduce different classes of missiles and rockets to students.
02. To impart adequate knowledge on various airframe components of missiles
and their functions to students.
03. To give exposure to analyse the various forms of drag and its estimations to
students.
04. To make the students familiarize with the concepts of staging and stage
separation methods.
05. To make students learn the stability and control aspects of missiles.

UNIT I BASICS ASPECTS OF MISSILE AERODYNAMICS 9

Classification of missiles-Aerodynamics characteristics and requirements of air to air missiles,
air to surface missiles and surface to air missiles-Missile trajectories-fundamental aspects of
hypersonic aerodynamics.

UNIT II MISSILE CONFIGURATIONS AND DRAG ESTIMATION 9

Various configurations-components-forces on the vehicle during atmospheric flight-nose cone
design and drag estimation-various types of drag and their origin–methods to minimize the
drag types.

UNIT III AERODYNAMICS OF SLENDER AND BLUNT BODIES 9

Aerodynamics of slender and blunt bodies, wing-body interference effects-Asymmetric flow
separation and vortex shedding-unsteady flow characteristics of launch vehicles-
determination of aero elastic effects.
UNIT IV AERODYNAMIC ASPECTS OF LAUNCHING PHASE 9
Booster separation-cross wind effects-specific considerations in missile launching-missile
integration and separation-methods of evaluation and determination- Wind tunnel tests –
Comparison with CFD Analysis.

UNIT V STABILITY AND CONTROL OF MISSILES 9

Forces and moments acting on missiles-Lateral, rolling and longitudinal moments-missile
dispersion-stability aspects of missile configuration-Aerodynamic control methods-Jet control
methods-Stability derivatives.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Acquire enough knowledge on various configurations of missiles and rockets.
CO2: Predict the aerodynamics characteristics of various airframes components.
CO3: Acquire knowledge on unsteady flow characterizes of launch vehicles.
CO4: Compare the aerodynamics performance of missiles determined form wind
tunnel tests and CFD results.
CO5: Determine the stability characteristics of missiles and necessary forces
required to control.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1       
CO2        
CO3         
CO4         
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Chin SS, Missile Configuration Design, McGraw Hill, New York, 1961.
02. Nielsen, Jack N, Stever, Gutford, “Missile Aerodynamics”, McGraw Hill, New York,
1988.

REFERENCES:
01. Anderson, J.D., “Fundamentals of Aerodynamics”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York,
2011.
02. John D. Anderson. Jr., “Hypersonic and High Temperature Gas Dynamics”, AIAA; 2nd
edition, 2006.
03. John D. Anderson. Jr., “Modern Compressible flow with historical Perspective”,
McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 3rd edition, 2002.
AE5017 NUMERICAL HEAT TRANSFER LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To impart knowledge to students in the fundamental principles of various
numerical methods which are useful to obtain numerical solutions to heat transfer
problems.
02. To make the students learn numerical methods to obtain solution to 1-D, 2-D and
3-D conductive heat transfer problems.
03. To introduce both implicit and explicit methods for numerical solution of transient
heat conduction problems to students.
04. To make the students familiarize with the numerical treatment of convective heat
transfer problems to compute velocity and temperature profiles in boundary
problems.
05. To acquaint students with the use of finite volume method in radiative heat
transfer problems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Finite Difference Method-Introduction-Taylor’s series expansion - Discretization Methods
Forward, backward and central differencing scheme for first order and second order Derivatives
– Types of partial differential equations-Types of errors. Solution to algebraic equation-Direct
Method and Indirect Method-Types of boundary condition. FDM - FEM - FVM.

UNIT II CONDUCTIVE HEAT TRANSFER 9

General 3D-heat conduction equation in Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical coordinates.
Computation (FDM) of One –dimensional steady state heat conduction with Heat generation-
without Heat generation- 2D-heat conduction problem with different boundary conditions-
Numerical treatment for extended surfaces. Numerical treatment for 3D- Heat conduction.
Numerical treatment to 1D-steady heat conduction using FEM.

UNIT III TRANSIENT HEAT CONDUCTION 9

Introduction to Implicit, explicit Schemes and crank-Nicolson Schemes Computation(FDM) of
One – dimensional un-steady heat conduction –with heat Generation-without Heat generation -
2D-transient heat conduction problem with different boundary conditions using Implicit, explicit
Schemes. Importance of Courant number. Analysis for I-D,2-D transient heat Conduction
problems.

UNIT IV CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER 9

Convection- Numerical treatment (FDM) of steady and unsteady 1 -D and 2-d heat convection-
diffusion steady-unsteady problems- Computation of thermal and Velocity boundary layer flows.
Upwind scheme. Stream function-vorticity approach-Creeping flow.

UNIT V RADIATIVE HEAT TRANSFER 9

Radiation fundamentals-Shape factor calculation-Radiosity method- Absorption Method –
Montacalro method-Introduction to Finite Volume Method- Numerical treatment of radiation
enclosures using finite Volume method. Developing a numerical code for 1D, 2D heat transfer
problems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Acquire knowledge on the basic concepts on the applications of numerical
methods for the heat transfer problem solutions.
CO2: Appreciate the role of boundary conditions in defining the complexities and the
methodology for numerical solutions of heat transfer problems.
CO3: Use both implicit and explicit schemes for transient heat conduction problems.
CO4: Compute the temperature profiles in thermal boundary layer.
CO5: Apply finite volume methods for radiative heat transfer problems and the role of
Montecarlo methods in radiative heat transfer.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1       
CO2         
CO3       
CO4       
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Sachdeva,S.C., Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer, NEW AGE
publishers,2010.
02. Yunus A. Cengel, Heat Transfer – A Practical Approach Tata McGraw Hill 4thEdition,
2009.

REFERENCES:
01. NecatiOzisik, Finite Difference Method in Heat Transfer, CRC Press, 2nd edition, 2017.
02. Pradip Majumdar, Computational Methods for Heat & Mass Transfer, CRC Press, 2005.
03. YogeshJaluria, Kenneth E Torrence, Computational Heat transfer, CRC Press, 3rd
Edition, 2017.

AE5018 STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To study the effect of periodic and a periodic forces on mechanical systems and
the significance of resonance.
02. To gain knowledge in force deflection properties of structures.
03. Impart to the student the theory and understanding of free and forced vibrations
and system response.
04. To familiarise with the natural frequencies of a given physical system.
05. To gain knowledge in energy and approximate methods of analysis.

UNIT I FORCE DEFLECTION PROPERTIES OF STRUCTURES 9

Constraints and Generalized coordinates – Virtual work and generalized forces – Force –
Deflection influence functions – stiffness and flexibility methods.
UNIT II PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS 9
Free and forced vibrations of systems with finite degrees of freedom – Response to periodic
excitation – Impulse Response Function – Convolution Integral.

UNIT III NATURAL MODES OF VIBRATION 9

Equations of motion for Multi degree of freedom Systems - Solution of Eigen value problems –
Normal coordinates and orthogonality Conditions. Modal Analysis.

UNIT IV ENERGY METHODS 9

Rayleigh’s principle – Rayleigh – Ritz method – Coupled natural modes – Effect of rotary
inertia and shear on lateral vibrations of beams – Natural vibrations of plates.

UNIT V APPROXIMATE METHODS 9

Approximate methods of evaluating the Eigen frequencies and Eigen vectors by reduced,
subspace, Lanczos, Power, Matrix condensation and QR methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Demonstrate fundamental theory of dynamic equation of motion, analysis
methods for dynamic systems.
CO2: Will be able to: apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering by
developing the equations of motion for vibratory systems and solving for the free
and forced response.
CO3: Analyse the different energy methods used to investigate the vibration
characteristics of plates and beams.
CO4: Investigate the natural modes of vibration of different structural components and
Knowledge of mathematical modelling of structures.
CO5: Use approximate methods to investigate the natural modes of vibration of a
system.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1        
CO2        
CO3        
CO4        
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Hurty W.C. and M.F. Rubinstein, “Dynamics of Structures”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd.,New Delhi 1987.
02. Tse, I.E. Morse and H.T. Hinkle, “Mechanical Vibrations: Theory and Applications” ,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2004.

REFERENCES:
01. Ramamurthi, V “Mechanical Vibration Practice and Noise Control” Narosa Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd, 2008.
02. Timoshenko S.P., D.H. Young, “Vibration Problems in Engineering”, John Willey& Sons
Inc., 1984.
03. Vierck, R.K. “Vibration Analysis”, 2nd Edition, Thomas Y. Crowell & Co Harper &Row
Publishers, New York, U.S.A. 1989.
AE5071 AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS ENGINEERING
LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To introduce basic concepts of systems engineering and their application to
aircraft systems.
02. To acquaint students with design, build, test, operate and disposal phases of
aircraft systems and aircraft operating environment system.
03. To impart knowledge on evolution of avionics architecture and arrangements
of systems integration of aircraft.
04. To familiarise students with varying system configurations and their
compatibility and system evolution considerations.
05. To impart knowledge on fault and failure analysis of aircraft systems and
components and types of maintenance procedures

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS ENGINEERING 9

Overview-Systems Definition and Concepts-Conceptual System Design- System
Engineering Process- Everyday examples of systems-Aircraft systems.

UNIT II DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT PROCESS 9

Product Life Cycle –Concept Phase-Definition Phase-Design Phase-Build, Test, Operate and
Disposal Phase-Whole Life Cycle Tasks-Systems Analysis- Design Drivers in the Project,
Product, Operating Environment-Interfaces with the Subsystems.

UNIT III SYSTEM ARCHITECTURES AND INTEGRATION 9

Systems Architectures-Modeling and Trade-Offs- Evolution of Avionics Architectures-
Systems Integration Definition- Examples of Systems Integration-Integration Skills-
Management of Systems Integration.

UNIT IV PRACTICAL CONSIDERATIONS AND CONFIGURATION 9

CONTROL
Stake holders-Communications-Criticism- Configuration Control Process-Portrayal of a
System-Varying Systems Configurations- Compatibility-Factors Affecting Compatibility –
Systems Evolution Considerations and Integration of Aircraft Systems.

UNIT V SYSTEMS RELIABILITY AND MAINTAINABILITY 9

Systems and Components-Analysis-Influence, Economics, Design for Reliability-Fault and
Failure Analysis-Case Study-Maintenance Types-Program-Planning and Design.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Acquire knowledge on the basic working principle of hydraulic and pneumatic
systems and their components.
CO2: Identify the types of control systems namely conventional and modern
systems and the need to choose them for specific aircraft application.
CO3: Acquire knowledge on the different types of fuel system used for piston
engine and jet engines.
CO4: Identify the different configurations of aircrafts and compatibility of various
systems.
CO5: Acquire knowledge on the fault and failure analysis of aircraft systems.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1         
CO2           
CO3         
CO4          
CO5          

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Allan G. Seabridge and Ian Moir, “Design and Development of Aircraft Systems: An
Introduction “, (AIAA Education Series), 2004.

REFERENCES:
01. Andrew P. Sage, James E., Jr. Armstrong, "Introduction to Systems Engineering
(WileySeries in Systems Engineering and Management)”, 2000.
02. Aslaksen, Erik and Rod Belcher, “Systems Engineering”, Prentice Hall, 1992.
03. Peter.Sydenham , “Systems Approach to Engineering”, Artech house, Inc, London,
2004.

AE5072 AVIONICS SYSTEMS

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To introduce the basic of avionics and its need for civil and military aircrafts.
02. To impart knowledge about the avionic architecture and various avionics
data buses.
03. To gain more knowledge on various avionics subsystems.
04. To impart knowledge on feedback systems.
05. To gain knowledge in field of navigation systems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AVIONICS 9

Need for avionics in civil and military aircraft and space systems – Integrated avionics and
weapon systems – Typical avionics subsystems, design, technologies – Introduction to
Digital Computer and memories.

UNIT II DIGITAL AVIONICS ARCHITECTURE 9

Avionics system architecture – Data buses – MIL-STD-1553B – ARINC – 420 – ARINC – 629
– AFDX.

UNIT III FLIGHT DECKS AND COCKPITS 9

Control and display technologies: CRT, LED, LCD, EL and plasma panel – Touch screen –
Direct voice input (DVI) – Civil and Military Cockpits: MFDS, HUD, MFK, HOTAS.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO NAVIGATION SYSTEMS 9

Radio navigation – Dead – Reckoning systems, Hyperbolic Navigation - ILS, MLS – Inertial
Navigation Systems (INS) – Inertial sensors, INS block diagram – Satellite navigation
systems – GPS.
UNIT V AIR DATA SYSTEMS AND AUTO PILOT 9
Air data quantities – Altitude, Air speed, Vertical speed, Mach number, Auto pilot – Basic
principles, Longitudinal and lateral auto pilot.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Apply the basics of avionics subsystems architecture.
CO2: Distinguish between the needs of civil and military avionics systems.
CO3: Acquire knowledge on display technologies.
CO4: Build Digital avionics architecture.
CO5: Design navigation system and ability to design and perform analysis on air
data system.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1       
CO2       
CO3       
CO4       
CO5       

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Albert Helfrick.D., Principles of Avionics, Avionics Communications Inc., 7th Edition,
2012.
02. Collinson.R.P.G. Introduction to Avionics, Chapman and Hall, 2003.

REFERENCES:
01. Middleton, D.H., Ed., Avionics systems, Longman Scientific and Technical, Longman
Group UK Ltd., England, 1989.
02. Pallet.E.H.J., Aircraft Instruments and Integrated Systems, Longman Scientific,1992.
03. Spitzer, C.R. Digital Avionics Systems, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,U.S.A.
1993.
04. Spitzer. C.R. The Avionics Hand Book, CRC Press, 2000.

AE5019 FATIGUE AND FRACTURE MECHANICS

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
01. To impart knowledge in structural integrity in the context of fatigue failure.
02. To gain knowledge in statistical aspects of fatigue behaviour.
03. To impart knowledge in physical aspects of fatigue.
04. To familiarize the student with theoretical fracture mechanics and make
him/her competent to carry out simple fracture analysis procedures
05. To enable the student to appreciate the different aspects of fatigue testing
methods
UNIT I FATIGUE OF STRUCTURES 9
S.N. curves - Endurance limits - Effect of mean stress, Goodman, Gerber and Soderberg
relations and diagrams - Notches and stress concentrations - Neuber’s stress concentration
factors - Plastic stress concentration factors - Notched S.N. curves – Fatigue of composite
materials.

UNIT II STATISTICAL ASPECTS OF FATIGUE BEHAVIOUR 9

Low cycle and high cycle fatigue - Coffin - Manson’s relation - Transition life - cyclic strain
hardening and softening - Analysis of load histories - Cycle counting techniques -Cumulative
damage - Miner’s theory - Other theories.

UNIT III PHYSICAL ASPECTS OF FATIGUE 9

Phase in fatigue life - Crack initiation - Crack growth - Final Fracture - Dislocations - fatigue
fracture surfaces.

UNIT IV FRACTURE MECHANICS 9

Strength of cracked bodies - Potential energy and surface energy - Griffith’s theory - Irwin -
Orwin extension of Griffith’s theory to ductile materials - stress analysis of cracked bodies -
Effect of thickness on fracture toughness - stress intensity factors for typical geometries.

UNIT V FATIGUE DESIGN AND TESTING 9

Safe life and Fail-safe design philosophies - Importance of Fracture Mechanics in aerospace
structures - Application to composite materials and structures.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to

CO1: Develop a solid foundation in the theory, concepts and principles of fracture
mechanics,
CO2: Be able to use these solutions to guide a corresponding design, manufacture,
or failure analysis
CO3: Ability to investigate the life of a structure under dynamic loading conditions.
CO4: Knowledge of fracture mechanics approach applicable to homogeneous and
heterogeneous materials
CO5: Knowledge of probalistic approach and development of mathematical models
for life prediction of structures and knowledge of safe life and fail safe design.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1       
CO2       
CO3       
CO4       
CO5       
‘

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Barrois W, Ripley, E.L., “Fatigue of aircraft structure,” Pergamon press. Oxford, 1983.
02. Prashant Kumar – Elements of fracture mechanics” Tata McGraw Hill Education
Private Limited ,2009
REFERENCES:
01. KareHellan ,’Introduction to Fracture Mechanics’, McGraw Hill, Singapore,1985.
02. Knott, J.F., “Fundamentals of Fracture Mechanics,” - Buterworth& Co., Ltd., London,
1983.
03. Sih C.G., Sijthoff and W Noordhoff, “Mechanics of fracture Vol - I” International
Publishing Co., Netherlands, 1989.
AE5020 HELICOPTER ENGINEERING
LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To introduce fundamental aspects on helicopter rotor aerodynamics,
generation of lift and rotor control & efficiency to students
02. To make students familiarize with the concepts like hovering and vortex ring
state and calculation of induced power
03. To make students knowledgeable on helicopter flight performance
calculations and on criteria for selection of power plants
04. To acquaint students with lateral and longitudinal stability characteristics of
helicopter and the differences between stability and control
05. To elucidate students on the structural problems peculiar to helicopter rotor
like rotor vibration

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Helicopter as an aircraft, Basic features, Layout, Generation of lift, Main rotor, Gearbox, tail
rotor, power plant, considerations on blade, flapping and feathering, Rotor controls and
various types of rotor, Blade loading, Effect of solidity, profile drag, compressibility etc., Blade
area required, number of Blades, Blade form, Power losses, Rotor efficiency.

UNIT II AERODYNAMICS OF ROTOR BLADE 9

Aerofoil characteristics in forward flight, Hovering and Vortex ring state, Blade stall,
maximum lift of the helicopter calculation of Induced Power, High speed limitations; parasite
drag, power loading, ground effect.

UNIT III POWER PLANTS AND FLIGHT PERFORMANCE 9

Piston engines, Gas turbines, Ramjet principle, Comparative performance, Horsepower
required, Range and Endurance, Rate of Climb, Best Climbing speed, Ceiling in vertical
climb, Autorotation.

UNIT IV STABILITY AND CONTROL 9

Physical description of effects of disturbances, Stick fixed Longitudinal and lateral dynamic
stability, lateral stability characteristics, control response. Differences between stability and
control of airplane and helicopter.

UNIT V ROTOR VIBRATIONS 9

Dynamic model of the rotor, Motion of the rigid blades, flapping motion, lagging motion,
feathering motion, Properties of vibrating system, phenomenon of vibration, fuselage
response, vibration.
absorbers, Measurement of vibration in flight. Rotor Blade Design: General considerations,
Airfoil selection, Blade construction, Materials, Factors affecting weight and cost, Design
conditions, Stress analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to

CO1: Perform the Aerodynamics calculation of Rotor blade.
CO2: Perform stability and control characteristics of Helicopter.
CO3: Perform and control Rotor vibration.
CO4: Explain the stability characteristics of a helicopter.
CO5: Demonstrates the role of rotor vibrations in helicopter design.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1        
CO2        
CO3         
CO4         
CO5         

TEXT BOOKS
01. John Fay, Helicopter: history, piloting and How It Flies, Himalayan Books 1995.
02. Lalit Gupta, Helicopter Engineering; Himalayan Books New Delhi 1996.
03. Rathakrishnan E,Helicopter Aerodynamics,PHI Learning Pvt Ltd,NewDelhi,2019.

REFERENCES:
01. Joseph Schafer, Basic Helicopter Maintenance (Aviation Technician Training Course-
JS312642), Jeppesen 1980.
02. Prouty R W, Helicopter Aerodynamics, Phillips Pub Co, 1993.

AE5021 SPACE MECHANICS

LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:Of this course are
01. To introduce special needs for manned space missions and precalculation of
space environment to students.
02. To impart the knowledge on basis concepts of space mechanics like
Newton’s law of gravitation and its applications, reference co-ordinate
systems and position vs time relationships of celestial bodies.
03. To acquaint students on the methodologies for computation of satellite orbit
perturbations
04. To elucidate the concepts of space of influence and its purpose in computing
interplanetary trajectories to students.
05. To impart knowledge of various phases of ballistic trajectories and special
features of re-entry phase to students.

UNIT I SPACE ENVIRONMENT 9

Peculiarities of space environment and its description– effect of space environment on
materials of spacecraft structure and astronauts- manned space missions – effect on satellite
life time.

UNIT II BASIC CONCEPTS AND THE GENERAL N- BODY PROBLEM 9

The solar system – reference frames and coordinate systems – terminology related to the
celestial sphere and its associated concepts – Kepler’s laws of planetary motion and proof of
the laws – Newton’s universal law of gravitation - the many body problem - Lagrange-Jacobi
identity – the circular restricted three body problem – libration points – the general N-body
problem – two body problem – relations between position and time.
UNIT III SATELLITE INJECTION AND SATELLITE PERTURBATIONS 9
General aspects of satellite injection – satellite orbit transfer – various cases – orbit
deviations due to injection errors – special and general perturbations – Cowell’s method and
Encke’s method – method of variations of orbital elements – general perturbations approach.

UNIT IV INTERPLANETARY TRAJECTORIES 9

Two-dimensional interplanetary trajectories – fast interplanetary trajectories – three
dimensional interplanetary trajectories – launch of interplanetary spacecraft – trajectory
estimation about the target planet – concept of sphere of influence – Lambert’s theorem.

UNIT V BALLISTIC MISSILE TRAJECTORIES 9

Introduction to ballistic missile trajectories – boost phase – the ballistic phase – trajectory
geometry– optimal flights – time of flight – re-entry phase – the position of impact point –
influence coefficients.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to

CO1: Acquire knowledge on the unique features of space environment and its
effect on space craft and astronauts.
CO2: Compute position of bodies in orbits in terms of their coordinates with
respect to time.
CO3: Gain insights on the intricate aspects of satellite injectors.
CO4: Determine and compute interplanetary trajectories.
CO5: Make calculations of all important phases of missile trajectories.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO1 PO1
0 1 2
CO1          
CO2        
CO3         
CO4         
CO5         

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Cornelisse,J.W.,“Rocket Propulsion and Space Dynamics”,J.W. Freeman&Co.,Ltd,
London, 1982.
02. Parker, E.R., “Materials for Missiles and Spacecraft”, Mc.Graw Hill Book Co. Inc.,
1982.

REFERENCES:
01. Sutton, G.P., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons; 8th Edition 2010.
AE5022 APPROXIMATE METHODS IN STRUCTURAL MECHANICS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To gain knowledge in the various approximate methods available for solving
both boundary value and initial value problems involved in structural
mechanics.
02. To student must learn how to carry out static structural analysis of bars and
beams using different solution techniques
03. To gain knowledge in problem solving using the Rayleigh-Ritz, Galerkin and
finite difference method.
04. To familiarize with the estimation of the natural frequencies of continuous
and multi-degree of freedom systems.
05. To exposure the different mathematical tools required in structural analysis.

UNIT I STATIC STRUCTURAL ANAYSIS 9

Review of analytical methods for the solution of ordinary differential equations in structural
mechanics – Need for approximate methods – Introduction to matrix methods – Influence
Coefficients, Stiffness and Flexibility Matrices – Analysis of beams using matrix methods –
Determinate and Indeterminate Beam analysis – Truss Analysis.
UNIT II RAYLEIGH-RITZ & GALERKIN METHODS 9
Introduction to different weighted residual methods – Galerkin methods applied to the
analysis of bars and beams – The Rayleigh-Ritz method – Application of the Rayleigh-Ritz
method to static problems involving bars and beams – Variational principles – Stiffness
matrix formulation.
9
UNIT III FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD
Problem formulation using the finite difference technique – Bar under axial loads – Beams
subject to bending – Uniform members under torsion – Stresses in thick-walled pressure
vessels – Heat transfer problems using the finite difference method – Other practical
problems.
UNIT IV VIBRATION PROBLEMS 9
Continuous systems – Formulation of governing differential equations – Modelling a
continuous system into a multi-degree of freedom system – Methods of natural frequency
determination – Rayleigh method – Holzer method – Other eigen-value problems in
engineering.
UNIT V NUMERICAL METHODS 9
Numerical integration – Solution of simultaneous algebraic equations – Elementary studies
on the calculus of variation – Laplace and Fourier transforms and their application – Simple
coding with C++ / MATLAB – Numerical Integration for vibration problems
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1:Have knowledge on the difference between Strength of Materials approach and Theory
of Elasticity
CO2: Exhibit better understanding on the strain-displacement relation, stress-strain relations
and stress ellipsoid.
CO3: Demonstrate the knowledge on the classification of 2-D problems and the methods of
solution.
CO4: Formulate the governing equations and solve problems in torsion of non-circular
sections.
CO5: Acquire knowledge on the governing equation for plate bending and methods of
solution.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO1 PO1
0 1 2
CO1      
CO2      
CO3      
CO4      
CO5      

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Ansel C Ugural and Saul K Fenster, ‘Advanced Strength and Applied Elasticity’,
Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2003.
02. AsgharBhatti, M., Fundamental Finite Element Analysis and Applications: with
Mathematica and MATLAB Computations, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2005.
03. Chajes, A., Principles of Structural Stability Theory, Prentice Hall. Inc., 1987.
04. Szilard, R., Theory and Analysis of Plates – Classical and Numerical Methods,
Prentice Hall, 2004.

REFERENCES:
01. Bathe, K.J., and Wilson, E. L., Numerical Methods in Finite Element Method, Prentice
Hall (India) Ltd., 1985.
02. Chandrupatla R. Tirupathi, Belegundu D Ashok., Introduction to Finite Elements in
Engineering, Prentice Hall (India) Ltd, 2007.
03. Reddy, J. N., An Introduction to the Finite Element Method, McGraw-Hill, 2004.
04. Tauchert, T.R., Energy Principles in Structural Mechanics, McGraw Hill, International
Student Edition, 1989.

AE5023 COMBUSTION IN AEROSPACE VEHICLES

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To introduce basic concept of combustion process and calculation of
adiabatic flame temperature to students.
02. To make familiarize with basic laws of combustion and required kinetics of
chemical reactions.
03. To impart knowledge on the different classes of flame and their physical and
chemical characteristics to students.
04. To make the students familiarize with the combustion processes involved in
various jet propulsion.
05. To give students exposure on the combustion mechanism of various
propellants and the instability characteristics.

UNIT I THERMODYNAMICS OF COMBUSTION 9

Stoichiometry – absolute enthalpy- enthalpy of formation- enthalpy of combustion- laws of
thermo chemistry- pressure and temperature effect on enthalpy of formation, adiabatic flame
temperature, chemical and equilibrium products of combustion.

UNIT II PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY OF COMBUSTION 9

Fundamental laws of transport phenomena, Conservations Equations, Transport in
Turbulent Flow - Basic Reaction Kinetics, Elementary reactions, Chain reactions, Multistep
reactions, simplification of reaction mechanism, Global kinetics.
UNIT III PREMIXED AND DIFFUSED FLAMES 9
One dimensional combustion wave, Laminar premixed flame, Burning velocity measurement
methods, Effects of chemical and physical variables on Burning velocity, Flame extinction,
Ignition, Flame stabilizations, Turbulent Premixed flame. Gaseous and diffusion flame –
droplet combustion.

UNIT IV COMBUSTION IN GAS TURBINE, RAMJET AND SCRAMJET 9

Combustion in gas turbine chambers, recirculation, combustion efficiency, flame holders,
subsonic combustion in ramjet, supersonic combustion in scramjet. Subsonic and
supersonic combustion controlled by diffusion mixing and heat convection – peculiarities of
supersonic combustion.

UNIT V COMBUSTION IN CHEMICAL ROCKETS 9

Combustion in liquid propellant rockets - Combustion of solid propellants- application of
laminar flame theory to the burning of homogeneous propellants, Combustion in hybrid
rockets-combustion instability in rockets.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Calculate adiabatic flame temperature and estimate equilibrium products of
combustion.
CO2: Solve chemical kinetics and species conservation equations
CO3: Acquire knowledge in different flame structures and stability characteristics
CO4: Compare the performance of different combustors and design of flame
holders.
CO5: Analyse the combustion mechanisms of different propellants.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1       
CO2       
CO3        
CO4        
CO5        

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Kuo K.K. “Principles of Combustion” John Wiley and Sons, 2005.
02. Mathur, M.L. and Sharma, R.P., “Gas Turbine, Jet and Rocket
Propulsion”, Standard Publishers & Distributors, Delhi, Second edition 2014.
03. Mishra D. P., “Fundamentals of Combustion”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008.
04. Mukunda H. S., “Understanding Combustion”, Second edition, Orient Blackswan,
2009.
05. Warren C. Strahle, “An Introduction to Combustion”, Taylor & Francis, 1993.

REFERENCES:
01. Beer, J.M., and Chegar, N.A. “Combustion Aerodynamics”, Applied Science
Publishers Ltd., London, 1981.
02. Loh, W.H.T., “Jet, Rocket, Nuclear, Ion and Electric Propulsion: Theory and
Design(Applied Physics and Engineering)”, Springer Verlag, New York, 2012.
03. Sutton, G.P., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons; Eighth Edition 2010.
AE5024 HYPERSONIC AERODYNAMICS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To introduce basic concepts of hypersonic aerodynamics
02. To give exposure on various solution methods available for hypersonic inviscid flows
03. To make the students familiar with viscous hypersonic flow theory.
04. To impart basic knowledge on hypersonic viscous interaction similarity parameter and to
learn the basic aspects of shock wave boundary layer interactions.
05. To make the students familiar with the basic concepts of high temperature effects in
hypersonic flows.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF HYPERSONIC AERODYNAMICS 9

Introduction to hypersonic aerodynamics – differences between hypersonic aerodynamics
and supersonic aerodynamics - concept of thin shock layers and entropy layers – hypersonic
flight paths – hypersonic similarity parameters – shock wave and expansion wave relations of
inviscid hypersonic flows.

UNIT II SIMPLE SOLUTION METHODS FOR HYPERSONIC INVISCID 9

FLOWS
Local surface inclination methods – Newtonian theory – modified Newtonian law tangent
wedge and tangent cone and shock expansion methods – approximate methods - hypersonic
small disturbance theory – thin shock layer theory- blast wave theory-hypersonic equivalence
principle.

UNIT III VISCOUS HYPERSONIC FLOW THEORY 9

Boundary layer equations for hypersonic flow – hypersonic boundary layers – self similar and
non self-similar boundary layers – solution methods for non self-similar boundary layers –
aerodynamic heating and its adverse effects on airframe.

UNIT IV VISCOUS INTERACTIONS IN HYPERSONIC FLOWS 9

Introduction to the concept of viscous interaction in hypersonic flows - Strong and weak
viscous interactions - hypersonic viscous interaction similarity parameter – introduction to
shock wave boundary layer interactions.

UNIT V HIGH TEMPERATURE EFFECTS IN HYPERSONIC FLOWS 9

Nature of high temperature flows – chemical effects in air – real and perfect gases – Gibb’s
free energy and entropy - chemically reacting boundary layers – recombination and
dissociation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to

CO1: Gain knowledge in the peculiarities of hypersonic aerodynamics.
CO2: Determine shock and expansion wave propagation in hypersonic flows.
CO3: Gain insights in the use of approximate methods for hypersonic flow solution.
CO4: Acquire knowledge in shock wave boundary layer interaction.
CO5: Investigate the high temperature effects on hypersonic vehicles.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1        
CO2         
CO3         
CO4        
CO5         

TEXT BOOKS:
01. John D. Anderson. Jr., “Hypersonic and High Temperature Gas Dynamics”, AIAA;
Second Edition, 2006.
REFERENCES:
01. John D. Anderson. Jr., “Modern Compressible flow with historical Perspective”,
McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 3rd Edition, 2002.
02. John T. Bertin, “Hypersonic Aerothermodynamics”, published by AIAA Inc.,
Washington.D.C., 1994.

AE5025 SATELLITE TECHNOLOGY

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To introduce basic aspects of satellite subsystems and their functions,
peculiarities of space environment and types of satellite orbits to students.
02. To impart knowledge to students on orbit determination and manoeuvres
and ground station network requirements.
03. To make students familiarize with satellite mechanical and structural
configurations and satellite thermal control systems.
04. To acquaint students with satellite control requirements and type of control
manoeuvres and sensors needed for control.
05. To impart knowledge to students on satellite power electronics telemetry and
telecommand systems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SATELLITE SYSTEMS 9

Common satellite applications and missions – Typical spacecraft orbits – Definitions of spin
the three axis stabilization-Space environment – Launch vehicles – Satellite system and their
functions (structure, thermal, mechanisms, power, propulsion, guidance and control, bus
electronics).

UNIT II ORBITAL MECHANICS 9

Fundamental of flight dynamics – Time and coordinate systems – Orbit determination and
prediction – Orbital maneuvers – GPS systems and application for satellite/orbit
determination –Ground station network requirements.

UNIT III SATELLITE STRUCTURES & THERMAL CONTROL 9

Satellite mechanical and structural configuration: Satellite configuration choices, launch
loads, separation induced loads, deployment requirements – Design and analysis of satellite
structures – Structural materials and fabrication – The need of thermal control: externally
induced thermal environment – Internally induced thermal environment - Heat transfer
mechanism: internal to the spacecraft and external heat load variations – Thermal control
systems: active and passive methods.
UNIT IV SPACECRAFT CONTROL 9
Control requirements: attitude control and station keeping functions, type of control
maneuvers –Stabilization schemes: spin stabilization, gravity gradient methods, 3 axis
stabilization – Commonly used control systems: mass expulsion systems, momentum
exchange systems, gyro and magnetic torque - Sensors star and sun sensors, earth sensor,
magnetometers and inertial sensors.

UNIT V POWER SYSTEM AND BUS ELECTRONICS 9

Solar panels: Silicon and Ga-As cells, power generation capacity, efficiency – Space battery
systems – battery types, characteristics and efficiency parameters – Power electronics.
Telemetry and telecommand systems: Tm & TC functions, generally employed
communication bands (UHF/VHF, S, L, Ku, Ka etc), their characteristics and applications-
Coding Systems – Onboard computer- Ground checkout Systems.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Explain the concepts of Orbits and their mechanics.
CO2: Explain the concepts of structural design, analyzing techniques and various
types of loads in satellite structural subsystem.
CO3: Acquire knowledge on the importance of thermal control subsystem and its
design studies.
CO4: Explain the concepts of satellite sensors and actuators that needed for
Attitude control subsystem development.
CO5: Acquire the knowledge of satellite attitude as well as orbital dynamics in
order to design the satellite control subsystem.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1      
CO2      
CO3      
CO4     
CO5      

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Analysis and Design of Flight Vehicle Structures, Tri-State off set company, USA,
1980.
02. Francis J. Hale , 'Introduction Space Flight', Prentice Hall, 1994
03. Rilay, FF , 'Space Systems Engineering, McGraw Hill, 1982
04. Space Vehicle Design, Michael D. Griffin and James R. French, AIAA Education
Series, 1991.
05. Vertregt.M, 'Principles of Astronautics’.,Elsevier Publishing Company, 1985.

REFERENCES:
01. Craft Lewis H. Abraham Structural Design of Missiles & Space, McGraw Hill, 1992.
02. Hughes, P.C. Spacecraft Altitude Dynamics, Wilsey, 1986.
03. Richard.F, FilipowskyEugen I Muehllorf Space Communications Systems, , Prentice
Hall, 1995.
04. Spacecraft Thermal Control, Hand Book, Aerospace Press, 2002.
AE5026 UAV SYSTEM DESIGN
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To introduce the basic concepts of unmanned aerial vehicles.
02. To make students familiarise with the design aspects of UAV.
03. To impart knowledge on the hardware components and their application in
the UAV systems.
04. To infer about the communication and control detail of UAV.
05. To introduce the basic operational futures of UAV systems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO UAV 9

History of UAV –classification – Introduction to Unmanned Aircraft Systems--models and
prototypes – System Composition-applications.

UNIT II THE DESIGN OF UAV SYSTEM 9

Introduction to Design and Selection of the System- Aerodynamics and Airframe
Configurations-Characteristics of Aircraft Types- Design Standards and Regulatory Aspects-
UK,USA and Europe-Design for Stealth--control surfaces-specifications.

UNIT III AVIONICS HARDWARE 9

Autopilot –AGL-pressure sensors-servos-accelerometer –gyros-actuators- power supply-
processor, integration, installation, configuration, and testing.

UNIT IV COMMUNICATION PAYLOADS AND CONTROLS 9

Payloads-Telemetry-tracking-Aerial photography-controls-PID feedback-radio control
frequency range –modems-memory system-simulation-ground test-analysis-trouble shooting.

UNIT V DEVELOPMENT OF UAV SYSTEMS 9

Waypoints navigation-ground control software- System Ground Testing- System In-flight
Testing-Future Prospects and Challenges-Case Studies – Mini and Micro UAVs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Acquire knowledge on the importance of UAVs with respect to their
applications.
CO2: Identify and distinguish between various subsystems and configurations of
UAV.
CO3: Perform ground test and troubleshooting with respect to UAV operation.
CO4: Distinguish between needs of mini and micro UAVs.
CO5: Gain insights with design standards and regulatory aspects of UAVs.
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1     
CO2      
CO3      
CO4      
CO5      
REFERENCES:
01. Armand J. Chaput, “Design of Unmanned Air Vehicle Systems”,Lockheed Martin
Aeronautics Company, 2001.
02. Kimon P. Valavanis, “Advances in Unmanned Aerial Vehicles: State of the Art and
the Road to Autonomy”, Springer, 2007.
03. Paul G Fahlstrom, Thomas J Gleason, “Introduction to UAV Systems”, UAV Systems,
Inc,1998.
04. Reg Austin “unmanned aircraft systems UAV design, development and deployment”,
Wiley,2010.
05. Robert C. Nelson, Flight Stability and Automatic Control, McGraw-Hill, Inc, 1998.

IE5552 OPERATIONS RESEARCH LT PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Provide knowledge of optimization techniques and approaches.
 Formulate a real-world problem as a mathematical programming model.
 Enable the students apply mathematical, computational and communication skills
needed for the practical utility of Operations Research.
 Knowledge to solve networking problems.
 Knowledge to solve various inventory problems.
 Gain knowledge on solving different waiting line models .

UNIT I LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction to Operations Research – assumptions of linear programming problems -
Formulations of linear programming problem – Graphical method. Solutions to LPP using
simplex algorithm – Two phase method – Big M method

UNIT II ADVANCES IN LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9

Revised simplex method - primal dual relationships – Dual simplex algorithm – Sensitivity
analysis – changes in RHS value – changes in Coefficient of constraint – Adding new constraint
– Adding new variable.

UNIT III NETWORK ANALYSIS 9

Transportation problems: Northwest corner rule, least cost method, Vogel’s approximation
method - stepping stone method - MODI method – Unbalanced transportation – Assignment
problem – Hungarian algorithm –Project Management CPM & PERT. Minimum spanning tree
problem: Prim’s algorithm, Kruskal’s algorithm - Shortest path problem: Dijkstra’s algorithms,
Floyds algorithm - maximal flow problem: Maximal-flow minimum cut theorem - Maximal flow
algorithm

UNIT IV INVENTORY MODELS 9

Purchase model with no shortages – Manufacturing model with no shortages - Model with price
breaks - Reorder point model - Probabilistic inventory model

UNIT V QUEUING THEORY 9

Queuing theory terminology – Single server, multi server- limited and unlimited queue capacity-
limited and unlimited population –limited and infinite queue length.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Learned to translate a real-world problem, given in words, into a mathematical
Formulation.
CO2: An understanding of the role of algorithmic thinking in the solution of operations
research problems.
CO3: Be able to build and solve Transportation Models and Assignment Models, maximal
flow problem, minimum spanning tree and shortest path problem.
CO4: Able to handle issues in various Inventory models.
CO5: The students acquire capability in applying and using of queuing models for day today
Problem

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1    
CO2    
CO3     
CO4     
CO5     

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Panneerselvam R, “Operations Research”, PHI, 2009.
2. Srinivasan G., “Operations Research Principles and Applications”, PHI, 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. Hamdy A Taha, “Operations Research – An Introduction”, Pearson, 2017.
2. Philips, Ravindran and Solberg, “Operations Research principle and practise”, John
Wiley,2007
3. Ronald L Rardin, “Optimisation in Operations Research”, Pearson, 2018.

AE5027 HELICOPTER MAINTENANCE

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To impart knowledge on basic concepts of Head maintenance, Vibration
tracking of helicopter blades, Flight control systems and Mast adjustment
concepts.
02. To provide students with the fundamentals of Helicopter ground handling.
03. To make students learn the basic concept of main rotor transmission and
importance of torque meter maintenance.
04. To give an understanding of power plants, tail rotor systems servicing of
helicopters.
05. To make the students familiar with the Fuselage maintenance and Special
purpose equipments of helicopters.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Helicopter as an aircraft - Basic features - Evolution of helicopter - Helicopter configurations -
rotor arrangements - Compound Helicopter - jet rotor-no tail rotor concepts - Basic directions –
Ground handling - bearing – Gears.
UNIT II MAIN ROTOR ASSEMBLY 9
Head maintenance – blade alignment – Static main rotor balance – Vibration – Tracking – Span
wise dynamic balance – Blade sweeping – Electronic balancing. Dampener maintenance –
Counter weight adjustment – Auto rotation adjustments – Mast & Flight Control Rotor - Mast –
Stabilizer, dampeners. Swash plate flight control systems collective – Cyclic – Push pull tubes –
Torque tubes – Bell cranks. Mixer box – Gradient unit control boosts – Maintenance &
Inspection control rigging.

UNIT III MAIN ROTOR TRANSMISSIONS 9

Engine transmission coupling – Drive shaft Maintenance - clutch – Freewheeling units – Spray
clutch - Roller unit – Torque meter – Rotor brake Maintenance of these components - Vibrations
– Mounting systems – Transmissions.

UNIT IV POWER PLANTS & TAIL ROTORS 9

Fixed wing power plant modifications – Installation - Different type of power plant maintenance -
Tail rotor system – Servicing tail rotor track - System rigging.

UNIT V AIRFRAMES AND RELATED SYSTEMS 9

Rotary wing Fuselage structural construction - Tubular, sheet metal, Bonded - Bell 206, Hughes
500, Eurocopter BO - 105 Fuselage- Fuselage maintenance. Airframe Systems - Stress and
loads on Airframe, Wheel and skid Gear, visibility. Structural components and materials, Special
purpose equipment.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Appreciate the different configurations and basic elements of helicopters.
CO2: Perform maintenance of main rotor assembly of helicopters.
CO3: Identify the various sources of vibration and the solutions to effectively control
the vibrations in helicopters.
CO4: Perform maintenance of helicopter power plants.
CO5: Investigate the vibrational problems in helicopter airframe.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1    
CO2     
CO3      
CO4      
CO5       

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Gupta. L “Helicopter Engineering”, Himalayan Books, 1996.
02. Jeppesen, “Helicopter Maintenance Hand Book”, Jeppesons and Sons Inc., 2000.

REFERENCES:
01. “Civil Aircraft Inspection Procedures”, Part I and II, CAA, English Book House, New
Delhi, 1986.
02. LARRY REITHMIER, “Aircraft Repair Manual”, Palamar Books Marquette, 1992.
AE5028 SMART MATERIALS AND STRUCTURES
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Of this course are
01. To familiarize with the fundamentals of structural health monitoring.
02. To impart knowledge in the areas of Vibration based techniques in structural
health monitoring, fiberoptics and Piezo electric sensors.
03. To familiarize with the fundamentals of fabrication, modelling, analysis, and
design of smart materials and structures.
04. To enable the student to get exposed to the state of the art of smart materials
and systems, spanning piezoelectrics, shape memory, alloys, electro active
polymers.
05. To familiarize with artificial neural networks and image processing

UNIT I OVERVIEW AND INTRODUCTION 9

Piezoelectric Material Crystal Structure – Fundamentals of Piezoelectricity – Shape Memory
Alloys – Fundamentals of Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) Behaviour – Phase Transformation –
Lattice Structure and Deformation Mechanism – Electrostrictive Material Systems – ER and
MR Fluids – Current Application – Aerospace Field – Machine Tools – Automotive Systems –
Medical Systems – Electronics Equipment – Robots – Energy Harvesting Using Smart
Materials.

UNIT II PIEZOELECTRIC THEORY 9

Electromechanical Constitutive Equations – Piezoceramic Actuator & Sensor Equations –
Piezoelectric Coupling Coefficients – Actuator Performance and Load Line Analysis –
Hysteresis and Nonlinearities in Piezoelectric Materials – Piezoceramic Actuators – Behavior
under Static & Dynamic Excitation Fields – Depoling Behavior and Dielectric Breakdown –
Curie Temperature – Power Consumption – Equivalent Circuits to Model Piezoceramic
Actuators – The Bimorph Sensor.

UNIT III BEAM MODELLING WITH PIEZOELECTRIC MATERIAL 9

Basic Definitions of Stress, Strains and Displacements in Beams – Transverse Deflection of
Uniform Isotropic Beams – Simple Blocked Force Beam Model (Pin Force Model) – Single
Actuator Characteristics – Dual Actuators – Symmetric & Asymmetric Actuation with Differential
Voltages – Uniform Strain Model – Euler-Bernoulli Beam Model – Dissimilar Actuators –
Embedded Actuators – Testing of a Beam with Surface Mounted Piezoactuators.

UNIT IV UNDERSTANDING SHAPE MEMORY ALLOYS (SMA) 9

Low Temperature Stress-Strain Curve – Origin of the One-Way Shape Memory Effect – Stress
Induced Martensite and Pseudoelasticity – Two-Way Shape Memory Effect – All-Round Shape
Memory Effect – R-Phase Transformation – Porous SMA – Constrained Behavior of SMA –
Free Recovery – Constrained Recovery – Effective Load-Lines of an SMA Wire Actuator –
Sample Preparation – Transformation Temperatures under Zero Stress.

UNIT V CONSTITUTIVE MODELLING AND SMA BEHAVIOUR 9

Tanaka Model – Liang and Rogers Model – Brinson Model – Testing of SMA Wires –Variation
of Transformation Temperatures with Stress – Stress-Strain Behavior at Constant Temperature
– Stress-Temperature Behavior at Constant Strain – Heat Absorbed by the SMA Wire –
Thermomechanical Energy EquilibriumPower Requirements for SMA Activation – Resistance
Behavior of SMA Wires – Heat Dissipation – SMA Wire Damping Capacity.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Classify the various forms of functional materials.
CO2: Investigate the Piezoelectric material behaviour.
CO3: Investigate the behaviour of SMA material.
CO4: Model a beam with Piezoelectric patch.
CO5: Impart knowledge on modelling of SMA material.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1      
CO2      
CO3       
CO4       
CO5      

TEXT BOOKS:
01. Inderjit Chopra and Jayant Sirohi,' Smart Structures Theory', Cambridge University
Press, 2014.

REFERENCES:
01. Martin, J.W., Engineering Materials, Their properties and Applications, Wykedham
Publications (London) Ltd., 1987.
02. Prasad, N. Eswara, Wanhill, R. J. H, 'Aerospace Materials and Material
Technologies – Indian Institute of Metals Series, 2017.
03. Sam Zhang, 'Aerospace Materials Handbook (Advances in Materials Science and
Engineering) 1st Edition , 2016.
04. Van Vlack.L.H., Elements of Materials Science and Engineering Prentice Hall;
Publishers, Sixth edition, 1989.

AE5029 NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:Of this course are
01. To create awareness on alternate sources of energy – their availability and
utility.
02. To make student understand the theory of solar energy tapping.
03. To make student understand the design aspects and durability of batteries,
fuel cells and flywheels.
04. To impart knowledge the students on wind turbine aerodynamics.
05. To introduce basic design aspects of wind turbines.

UNIT I SOLAR ENERGY 9

Introduction – Conventional sources of energy – Overview of non-conventional energy
resources – Solar energy incident on earth – Solar spectrum – Overview of solar energy
technologies – Solar thermal devices – Photovoltaic panels – Biomass – Performance and
durability of solar devices.
UNIT II BATTERIES AND FUEL CELLS 9
Battery basics – Different types of batteries – Testing and performance of batteries – Inverters
– Fuel cell types – Fuel processing – Concept to product – Performance aspects – Design
principles of fuel cells – Materials used – Efficiency calculations – Durability of the device –
Current limitations.

UNIT III WIND ENERGY 9

History of wind turbines – Current use – Cost and other practical issues – Wind types –
Physical principles –– Blade theory – Wind turbine aerodynamics – Betz limit – Wind power
calculation – Power curve – Conversion of energy – Energy storage – Efficiency –Types of
wind turbines.

UNIT IV WIND TURBINE DESIGN 9

Components of a wind turbine – Design loads for horizontal axis wind turbines – Extreme
loading cases – Blade aerodynamics performance and blade design – Conceptual design of a
horizontal axis wind turbine – Stresses in blades – Blade dynamic response – Load transfer to
hub, shaft and nacelle.

UNIT V FLYWHEELS AND SUPERCAPACITORS 9

History and application of flywheels and super capacitors – Working principle – Material
selection principle – Energy extraction and storage – Construction details – Device
performance – Design principles – Electrical parameters in capacitor design – Current
commercial application.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, Students will be able to
CO1: Explain concept of various form conventional energy.
CO2: Demonstrate various types of batteries and their applications.
CO3: Analyse the performance of wind turbine blades.
CO4: Do preliminary design for the development of wind turbine.
CO5: Demonstrate concept of energy storing devices.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1        
CO2        
CO3        
CO4       
CO5        
TEXT BOOKS:
01. Rajput R.K,'Non-Conventional Energy Sources and Utilisation (Energy
Engineering) Paperback, 2014.

REFERENCES:
01. Fuel Cell Handbook (Seventh Edition) Paperback – Import, 8 May 2016 by EG&G
Technical Services Inc. , U.S. Department of Energy.
02. Musa,S ' Solar Energy Handbook' (MLI Handbook Series) Hardcover – Import, 2018.
03. Thomas Reddy,' Linden's Handbook of Batteries', 4th Edition, Kindle Edition,2001
04. Tiwari, G. N. and Arvind Tiwari , 'Shyam Handbook of Solar Energy: Theory, Analysis
and Applications (Energy Systems in Electrical Engineering) Paperback – Import, 14
Jun 2018.
05. Tony Burton , Nick Jenkins, David Sharpe and Ervin Bossanyi ,'Wind Energy
Handbook', 2nd Edition,2012.
AD5091 CONSTITUTION OF INDIA
LT P C
3 00 0
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Teach history and philosophy of Indian Constitution.
 Describe the premises informing the twin themes of liberty and freedom from a civil rights
perspective.
 Summarize powers and functions of Indian government.
 Explain emergency rule.
 Explain structure and functions of local administration.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
History of Making of the Indian Constitution-Drafting Committee- (Composition & Working) -
Philosophy of the Indian Constitution-Preamble-Salient Features

UNIT II CONTOURS OF CONSTITUTIONAL RIGHTS & DUTIES 9

Fundamental Rights-Right to Equality-Right to Freedom-Right against Exploitation Right to
Freedom of Religion-Cultural and Educational Rights-Right to Constitutional Remedies Directive
Principles of State Policy-Fundamental Duties

UNIT III ORGANS OF GOVERNANCE 9

Parliament-Composition-Qualifications and Disqualifications-Powers and Functions-Executive
President-Governor-Council of Ministers-Judiciary, Appointment and Transfer of Judges,
Qualifications Powers and Functions

UNIT IV EMERGENCY PROVISIONS 9

Emergency Provisions - National Emergency, President Rule, Financial Emergency

UNIT V LOCAL ADMINISTRATION 9

District’s Administration head- Role and Importance-Municipalities- Introduction- Mayor and role of
Elected Representative-CEO of Municipal Corporation-Pachayati raj- Introduction- PRI- Zila
Pachayat-Elected officials and their roles- CEO ZilaPachayat- Position and role-Block level-
Organizational Hierarchy (Different departments)-Village level- Role of Elected and Appointed
officials-Importance of grass root democracy

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Able to understand history and philosophy of Indian Constitution.
CO2: Able to understand the premises informing the twin themes of liberty and freedom
from a civil rights perspective.
CO3: Able to understand powers and functions of Indian government.
CO4: Able to understand emergency rule.
CO5: Able to understand structure and functions of local administration.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1  
CO2  
CO3  
CO4  
CO5  
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Basu D D, Introduction to the Constitution of India, Lexis Nexis, 2015.
2. Busi S N, Ambedkar B R framing of Indian Constitution, 1st Edition, 2015.
3. Jain M P, Indian Constitution Law, 7th Edn., Lexis Nexis, 2014.
4. The Constitution of India (Bare Act), Government Publication,1950

AD5092 VALUE EDUCATION

LT P C
3 00 0
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Develop knowledge of self-development
 Explain the importance of Human values
 Develop the overall personality through value education
 Overcome the self destructive habits with value education
 Interpret social empowerment with value education

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO VALUE EDUCATION 9

Values and self-development –Social values and individual attitudes, Work ethics, Indian vision of
humanism, Moral and non- moral valuation, Standards and principles, Value judgements

UNIT II IMPORTANCE OF VALUES 9

Importance of cultivation of values, Sense of duty, Devotion, Self-reliance, Confidence,
Concentration, Truthfulness, Cleanliness. Honesty, Humanity, Power of faith, National Unity,
Patriotism, Love for nature, Discipline

UNIT III INFLUENCE OF VALUE EDUCATION 9

Personality and Behaviour development - Soul and Scientific attitude. Positive Thinking, Integrity
and discipline, Punctuality, Love and Kindness, Avoid fault Thinking, Free from anger, Dignity of
labour, Universal brotherhood and religious tolerance, True friendship Happiness Vs suffering,
love for truth.

UNIT IV REINCARNATION THROUGH VALUE EDUCATION 9

Aware of self-destructive habits, Association and Cooperation, Doing best for saving nature
Character and Competence –Holy books vs Blind faith, Self-management and Good health,
Science of reincarnation

UNIT V VALUE EDUCATION IN SOCIAL EMPOWERMENT 9

Equality, Non violence, Humility, Role of Women, All religions and same message, Mind your
Mind, Self-control, Honesty, Studying effectively
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 – Gain knowledge of self-development
CO2 – Learn the importance of Human values
CO3 – Develop the overall personality through value education
CO4 – Overcome the self destructive habits with value education
CO5 – Interpret social empowerment with value education
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1       
CO2       
CO3       
CO4       
CO5       

REFERENCES:
1. Chakroborty , S.K. “Values and Ethics for organizations Theory and practice”, Oxford
University Press ,New Delhi

AD5093 PEDAGOGY STUDIES LT P C

3 00 0

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understand the methodology of pedagogy.
 Compare pedagogical practices used by teachers in formal and informal classrooms in
developing countries.
 Infer how can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school curriculum and
guidance materials best support effective pedagogy.
 Illustrate the factors necessary for professional development.
 Identify the Research gaps in pedagogy.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND METHODOLOGY: 9

Aims and rationale, Policy background, Conceptual framework and terminology - Theories of
learning, Curriculum, Teacher education - Conceptual framework, Research questions - Overview
of methodology and Searching.

UNIT II THEMATIC OVERVIEW 9

Pedagogical practices are being used by teachers in formal and informal classrooms in
developing countries - Curriculum, Teacher education.

UNIT III EVIDENCE ON THE EFFECTIVENESS OF PEDAGOGICAL PRACTICES 9

Methodology for the in depth stage: quality assessment of included studies - How can teacher
education (curriculum and practicum) and the school curriculum and guidance materials best
support effective pedagogy? - Theory of change - Strength and nature of the body of evidence for
effective pedagogical practices - Pedagogic theory and pedagogical approaches - Teachers’
attitudes and beliefs and Pedagogic strategies.

UNIT IV PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT 9

Professional development: alignment with classroom practices and follow up support - Peer
support - Support from the head teacher and the community - Curriculum and assessment -
Barriers to learning: limited resources and large class sizes

UNIT V RESEARCH GAPS AND FUTURE DIRECTIONS 9

Research design – Contexts – Pedagogy - Teacher education - Curriculum and assessment -
Dissemination and research impact.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the methodology of pedagogy.
 Understand Pedagogical practices used by teachers in formal and informal classrooms in
developing countries.
 Find how can teacher education (curriculum and practicum) and the school curriculum and
guidance materials best support effective pedagogy.
 Know the factors necessary for professional development.
 Identify the Research gaps in pedagogy.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
CO5

REFERENCES:
1. Ackers J, Hardman F (2001) Classroom interaction in Kenyan primary schools, Compare,
31 (2): 245-261.
2. Agrawal M (2004) Curricular reform in schools: The importance of evaluation, Journal of
Curriculum Studies, 36 (3): 361-379.
3. Akyeampong K (2003) Teacher training in Ghana - does it count? Multi-site teacher
education research project (MUSTER) country report 1. London: DFID.
4. Akyeampong K, Lussier K, Pryor J, Westbrook J (2013) Improving teaching and learning
of basic maths and reading in Africa: Does teacher preparation count? International
Journal Educational Development, 33 (3): 272–282.
5. Alexander RJ (2001) Culture and pedagogy: International comparisons in primary
education. Oxford and Boston: Blackwell.

AD5094 STRESS MANAGEMENT BY YOGA

LTPC
30 00

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Develop healthy mind in a healthy body thus improving social health also improve efficiency
 Invent Do’s and Don’t’s in life through Yam
 Categorize Do’s and Don’t’s in life through Niyam
 Develop a healthy mind and body through Yog Asans
 Invent breathing techniques through Pranayam

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO YOGA 9

Definitions of Eight parts of yog. ( Ashtanga )

UNIT II YAM 9
Do`s and Don’t’s in life.
Shaucha, santosh, tapa, swadhyay, ishwarpranidhan

UNIT III NIYAM 9

Do`s and Don’t’s in life.
Ahinsa, satya, astheya, bramhacharya and aparigraha
UNIT IV ASAN 9
Various yog poses and their benefits for mind & body

UNIT V PRANAYAM 9
Regularization of breathing techniques and its effects-Types of pranayam
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 – Develop healthy mind in a healthy body thus improving social health also improve
efficiency
CO2 – Learn Do’s and Don’t’s in life through Yam
CO3 – Learn Do’s and Don’t’s in life through Niyam
CO4 – Develop a healthy mind and body through Yog Asans
CO5 – Learn breathing techniques through Pranayam

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1   
CO2   
CO3   
CO4   
CO5   

REFERENCES:
1. “Rajayoga or conquering the Internal Nature” by Swami Vivekananda, Advaita Ashrama
(Publication Department), Kolkata
2. ‘Yogic Asanas for Group Tarining-Part-I” : Janardan Swami Yogabhyasi Mandal, Nagpur

AD5095 PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT THROUGH LIFE ENLIGHTENMENT SKILLS

LT PC
3 0 00
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Develop basic personality skills holistically
 Develop deep personality skills holistically to achieve happy goals
 Rewrite the responsibilities
 Reframe a person with stable mind, pleasing personality and determination
 Discover wisdom in students

UNIT I NEETISATAKAM-HOLISTIC DEVELOPMENT OF PERSONALITY - I 9

Verses- 19,20,21,22 (wisdom) - Verses- 29,31,32 (pride & heroism) – Verses- 26,28,63,65 (virtue)

UNIT II NEETISATAKAM-HOLISTIC DEVELOPMENT OF PERSONALITY - II 9

Verses- 52,53,59 (dont’s) - Verses- 71,73,75,78 (do’s)

UNIT III APPROACH TO DAY TO DAY WORK AND DUTIES 9

Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta: Chapter 2-Verses 41, 47,48 - Chapter 3-Verses 13, 21, 27, 35 Chapter
6-Verses 5,13,17,23, 35 - Chapter 18-Verses 45, 46, 48

UNIT IV STATEMENTS OF BASIC KNOWLEDGE – I 9

Statements of basic knowledge - Shrimad Bhagwad Geeta: Chapter2-Verses 56, 62, 68 Chapter
12 -Verses 13, 14, 15, 16,17, 18
UNIT V PERSONALITY OF ROLE MODEL - SHRIMAD BHAGWADGEETA 9
Chapter2-Verses 17, Chapter 3-Verses 36,37,42 - Chapter 4-Verses 18, 38,39 Chapter18 –
Verses 37,38,63
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: To develop basic personality skills holistically
CO2: To develop deep personality skills holistically to achieve happy goals
CO3: To rewrite the responsibilities
CO4: To reframe a person with stable mind, pleasing personality and determination
CO5: To awaken wisdom in students

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1  
CO2  
CO3  
CO4  
CO5  

REFERENCES:
1. Gopinath,Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthanam P, Bhartrihari’s ThreeSatakam , Niti-sringar-
vairagya, New Delhi,2010
2. Swami Swarupananda , Srimad Bhagavad Gita, Advaita Ashram,Publication Department,
Kolkata,2016

AD5097 ESSENCE OF INDIAN KNOWLEDGE TRADITION LT PC

3 0 0
0

COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course will introduce the students to
 get a knowledge about Indian Culture
 Know Indian Languages and Literature religion and philosophy and the fine arts in India
 Explore the Science and Scientists of Ancient, Medieval and Modern India
 Understand education systems in India

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CULTURE 9

Culture, civilization, culture and heritage, general characteristics of culture, importance of
culture in human literature, Indian Culture, Ancient India, Medieval India, Modern India.
UNIT II INDIAN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 9
Indian Languages and Literature – I: Languages and Literature of South India, – Indian
Languages and Literature – II: Northern Indian Languages & Literature
UNIT III RELIGION AND PHILOSOPHY 9
Major religions practiced in India and Understanding their Philosophy – religious movements in
Modern India (Selected movements only)
UNIT IV FINE ARTS IN INDIA (ART, TECHNOLOGY& ENGINEERING) 9
Indian Painting, Indian handicrafts, Music, divisions of Indian classic music, modern Indian
music, Dance and Drama, Indian Architecture (ancient, medieval and modern), Science and
Technology in India, development of science in ancient, medieval and modern India

UNIT V EDUCATION SYSTEM IN INDIA 9

Education in ancient, medieval and modern India, aims of education, subjects, languages,
Science and Scientists of Ancient India, Science and Scientists of Medieval India, Scientists of
Modern India
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After successful completion of the course the students will be able to
 Understand philosophy of Indian culture.
 Distinguish the Indian languages and literature.
 Learn the philosophy of ancient, medieval and modern India.
 Acquire the information about the fine arts in India.
 Know the contribution of scientists of different eras.
 Understand education systems in India

REFERENCES:
1. Kapil Kapoor, “Text and Interpretation: The India Tradition”,ISBN: 81246033375, 2005
2. “Science in Samskrit”, Samskrita Bharti Publisher, ISBN 13: 978-8187276333, 2007
3. NCERT, “Position paper on Arts, Music, Dance and Theatre”, ISBN 81-7450 494-X, 200
4. Narain, “Examinations in ancient India”, Arya Book Depot, 1993
5. Satya Prakash, “Founders of Sciences in Ancient India”, Vijay Kumar Publisher, 1989
6. M. Hiriyanna, “Essentials of Indian Philosophy”, Motilal Banarsidass Publishers, ISBN
13: 978- 8120810990, 2014

AD5098 SANGA TAMIL LITERATURE APPRECIATION L T PC

3 0 0 0

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to make the students an appreciation for:
1. Introduction to Sanga Tamil Literature.
2. ‘Agathinai’ and ‘Purathinai’ in Sanga Tamil Literature.
3. ‘Attruppadai’ in Sanga Tamil Literature.
4. ‘Puranaanuru’ in Sanga Tamil Literature.
5. ‘Pathitrupaththu’ in Sanga Tamil Literature.

UNIT I SANGA TAMIL LITERATURE AN INTRODUCTION 9

Introduction to Tamil Sangam – History of Tamil Three Sangams – Introduction to Tamil
Sangam Literature – Special Branches in Tamil Sangam Literature - Tamil Sangam
Literature’s Grammar - Tamil Sangam Literature’s parables.

UNIT II ‘AGATHINAI’ AND ‘PURATHINAI’ 9

Tholkappiyar’s Meaningful Verses – Three literature materials – Agathinai’s message -
History of Culture from Agathinai – Purathinai – Classification – Mesaage to Society from
Purathinai.
UNIT III ‘ATTRUPPADAI’. 9
Attruppadai Literature – Attruppadai in ‘Puranaanuru’ - Attruppadai in ‘Pathitrupaththu’ –
Attruppadai in ‘Paththupaattu’.

UNIT IV ‘PURANAANURU’ 9
Puranaanuru on Good Administration, Ruler and Subjects – Emotion & its Effect in
Puranaanuru.

UNIT V ‘PATHITRUPATHTHU’ 9
Pathitrupaththu in ‘Ettuthogai’ – Pathitrupaththu’s Parables – Tamil dynasty: Valor,
Administration, Charity in Pathitrupaththu - Mesaage to Society from Pathitrupaththu.

TOTAL (L: 45) = 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Appreciate and apply the messages in Sanga Tamil Literature in their life.
2. Differentiate ‘Agathinai’ and ‘Purathinai’ in their personal and societal life.
3. Appreciate and apply the messages in ‘Attruppadai’ in their personal and societal life.
4. Appreciate and apply the messages in ‘Puranaanuru’ in their personal and societal life.
5. Appreciate and apply the messages in ‘Pathitrupaththu’ in their personal and societal
life.

REFERENCES:
1. Sivaraja Pillai, The Chronology of the Early Tamils, Sagwan Press, 2018.
2. Hank Heifetz and George L. Hart, The Purananuru, Penguin Books, 2002.
3. Kamil Zvelebil, The Smile of Murugan: On Tamil Literature of South India, Brill Academic
Pub, 1997.
4. George L. Hart, Poets of the Tamil Anthologies: Ancient Poems of Love and War,
Princeton University Press, 2015.
5. Xavier S. Thani Nayagam, Landscape and poetry: a study of nature in classical Tamil
poetry, Asia Pub. House, 1967.

P PS
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 O 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 O2 3
1 0.9 0.6
2 0.9 0.6
3 0.9 0.6
4 0.9 0.6
5 0.9 0.6
 HSMC– ELECTIVES – HUMANITIES I (ODD SEMESTER)

HU5171 LANGUAGE AND COMMUNICATION LT P C

3003
COURSE DESCRIPTION
This course offers an introduction to language and communication. The primary goal of this
course is to familiarize students with key ideas related to communication using language as well
as non verbal means. Ideas related to the use of language and the underlying power structures
are also examined. The course also examines the role of media in communication and in the
dissemination of ideas as well as opinions.

Objectives
 To familiarize students with the concept of communication using linguistic and non
linguistic resources.
 To help students ask critical questions regarding facts and opinions.
 To provide students with the material to discuss issues such as language and power
structures.
 To help students think critically about false propaganda and fake news.
Learning Outcomes
 Students will be able to use linguistic and non linguistic resources of language in an
integrated manner for communication.
 Students will be able to analyse communication in terms of facts and opinions.
 Students will be able to discuss, analyse and argue about issues related to language and
power.
UNIT I LINGUISTIC AND NON-LINGUISTIC RESOURCE OF COMMUNICATION: 9
a) Writing and Speech
b) Distinction between language structure and language use, form and function, acceptability
and grammaticality
c) Gestures and Body language, pictures and symbols, cultural appropriacy
d) Communicative Competency, context and situation, combination of linguistic and non-
linguistic
elements of communication

UNIT II STRUCTURE OF WRITING/CONVERSATION: 9

a) Language skills and the communication cycle; speaking and listening, writing and reading
b) Initiating and closing conversations, intervention, turn taking
c) Writing for target reader, rhetorical devices and strategies
d) Coherence and Cohesion in speech and writing
UNIT III POWER STRUCTURE AND LANGUAGE USE: 9
a) Gender and language use
b) Politeness expressions and their use
c) Ethical dimensions of language use
d) Language rights as part of human rights
UNIT IV MEDIA COMMUNICATION: 9
a) Print media, electronic media, social media
b) Power of media
c) Manufacturing of opinion, fake news and hidden agendas
UNIT V PERSUASIVE COMMUNICATION AND MISCOMMUNICATION: 9
a) Fundamentals of persuasive communication
b) Persuasive strategies
c) Communication barriers
 TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Austin, 1962, J.L. How to do things with words. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Grice, P.1989.
Studies in the way of words. Cambridge, M.A: Harvard University Press.
2. Chomsky, N.1966. Aspects of the theory of syntax, The MIT press, Cambridge. Chomsky,
N.2006. Language and Mind, Cambridge University Press.
3. Hymes. D.N. 1972, On communication competence in J.B. Pride and J.Holmes (ed),
Sociolinguistics, pp 269-293, London Penguin.
4. Gilbert, H.Harman, 1976. Psychological aspect of the theory of syntax in Journal of
Philosophy, page 75-87.
5. Stephen. C. Levenson, 1983, Pragmatics, Cambridge University press.
6. Stangley, J. 2007. Language in Context. Clarendon press, Oxford. 7. Shannon, 1942. A
Mathematical Theory of Communication. 8. Searle, J.R. 1969. Speech acts: An essay in
the philosophy of language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

HU5172 VALUES AND ETHICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 Teach definition and classification of values.
 Explain Purusartha.
 Describe Sarvodaya idea.
 Summarize sustenance of life.
 Conclude views of hierarchy of values.

UNIT I DEFINITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF VALUES 9

Extrinsic values- Universal and Situational values- Physical- Environmental-Sensuous-
Economic-Social-Aesthetic-Moral and Religious values

UNIT II CONCEPTS RELATED TO VALUES 9

Purusartha-Virtue- Right- duty- justice- Equality- Love and Good

UNIT III IDEOLOGY OF SARVODAYA 9

Egoism- Altruism and universalism- The Ideal of Sarvodaya and Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam

UNIT IV SUSTENANCE OF LIFE 9

The Problem of Sustenance of value in the process of Social, Political and Technological
Changes

UNIT V VIEWS ON HIERARCHY OF VALUES 9

The Problem of hierarchy of values and their choice, The views of Pt. Madan Mohan Malviya
and Mahatma Gandhi
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1: Able to understand definition and classification of values.
CO2: Able to understand purusartha.
CO3: Able to understand sarvodaya idea.
CO4: Able to understand sustenance of life.
CO5: Able to understand views of hierarchy of values.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1   
CO2   
CO3   
CO4   
CO5   

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Awadesh Pradhan : Mahamanake Vichara. (B.H.U., Vanarasi-2007)
2. Little, William, : An Introduction of Ethics (Allied Publisher, Indian Reprint 1955)
3. William, K Frankena : Ethics (Prentice Hall of India, 1988)

HU5173 HUMAN RELATIONS AT WORK L T PC

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 Illustrate human relations at work its relationship with self.
 Explain the importance of interacting with people at work to develop teamwork.
 Infer the importance of physical health in maintaining human relations at work.
 Describe the importance of staying psychologically healthy.
 Identify the essential qualities for progressing in career.

UNIT I UNDERSTANDING AND MANAGING YOURSELF 9

Human Relations and You: Self-Esteem and Self-Confidence: Self-Motivation and Goal Setting;
Emotional Intelligence, Attitudes, and Happiness; Values and Ethics and Problem Solving and
Creativity.
UNIT II DEALING EFFECTIVELY WITH PEOPLE 9
Communication in the Workplace; Specialized Tactics for Getting Along with Others in the
Workplace; Managing Conflict; Becoming an Effective Leader; Motivating Others and
Developing Teamwork; Diversity and Cross-Cultural Competence.
UNIT III STAYING PHYSICALLY HEALTHY 9
Yoga, Pranayam and Exercise: Aerobic and anaerobic.
UNIT IV STAYING PSYCHOLOGICALLY HEALTHY 9
Managing Stress and Personal Problems, Meditation.

UNIT V DEVELOPING CAREER THRUST 9

Getting Ahead in Your Career, Learning Strategies, Perception, Life Span Changes, and
Developing Good Work Habits.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to
CO1: Understand the importance of self-management.
CO2: Know how to deal with people to develop teamwork.
CO3: Know the importance of staying healthy.
CO4: Know how to manage stress and personal problems.
CO5: Develop the personal qualities essential for career growth.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1      
CO2       
CO3      
CO4       
CO5       

TEXT BOOK:
1. Dubrien, A. J. (2017). Human Relations for Career and Personal Success: Concepts,
Applications, and Skills, 11th Ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson.
REFERENCES:
1. Greenberg, J. S. (2017). Comprehensive stress management (14th edition), New York:
McGraw Hill.
2. Udai, Y. (2015). Yogasanaurpranayam. New Delhi: N.S. Publications.

HU5174 PSYCHOLOGICAL PROCESSES L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE DESCRIPTION
Psychological Processes course is designed for students to be aware of the basic principles of
psychology for the better understanding of people’s psyche and behaviour around them. This
course enables learners to use the optimal use of different forms of thinking skills and thereby
results in effective communication in diverse situations. Every unit of the syllabus highlights the
psychological process of people, the most powerful and constructive use of perceptions.
OBJECTIVES
The major objectives of this course is
 To develop students’ awareness – on psychology, learning behavior and usage of
perception effectively.
 To learn to use the various kinds of thinking in a formal context.
 To critically evaluate content and comprehend the message on the bases of perception,
personality and intelligence.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
What is psychology? - Why study psychology? - Psychology as science – Behavior and its role
in human communication – socio-cultural bases of behaviour – Biological bases of behavior -
Brain and its functions – Principles of Heredity – Cognition and its functions Fields of psychology
– Cognitve and Perceptual – Industrial and Organizational.

UNIT II SENSORY & PERCEPTUAL PROCESSES

Some general properties of Senses: Visual system – the eye, colour vision – Auditory system –
Hearing, listening, Sounds - Other senses - Selective attention; physiological correlates of
attention; Internal influences on perception learning – set - motivation & emotion - cognitive
styles; External influences on perception figure and ground separation – movement –
organization – illusion; Internal- external interactions: Constancy - Depth Perception- Binocular
& Monocular Perception; Perceptual defense & Perceptual vigilance; Sensory deprivation -
Sensory bombardment; ESP - Social Perception.
UNIT III COGNITION & AFFECT
Learning and memory – philosophy of mind – concepts - words – images – semantic features –
Association of words – Repetition – Retrieval – Chunking - Schemata - Emotion and motivation
– nature and types of motivation – Biological & Psychosocial motivation – nature and types of
emotions – physiological & cognitive bases of emotions – expressions of emotions – managing
negative emotions - enhancing positive emotions.
UNIT IV THINKING, PROBLEM-SOLVING & DECISION MAKING
Thinking skills – Types of thinking skills – Concrete & Abstract thinking – Convergent &
Divergent - Analytical & Creative thinking – Problem & Possibility thinking – Vertical & Lateral
thinking – Problem solving skills – stages of problem solving skills – Decision making - intuition
and reasoning skills - Thinking and language - The thinking process- concepts, problem solving,
decision-making, creative thinking; language communication.
UNIT V PERSONALITY & INTELLIGENCE
Psychological phenomena & Attributes of humans - cognition, motivation, and behavior -
thoughts, feelings, perceptions, and actions – personality dimensions, traits, patterns -
Specialized knowledge, performance accomplishments, automaticity or ease of functioning,
skilled performance under challenge - generative flexibility, and speed of learning or behavior
change.

REFERENCES
1. Morgan, C.T.and King, R.A (1994) Introduction to Psychology, Tata McGraw Hill Co Ltd,
New Delhi.
2. Robert A. Baron (2002), Psychology, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, India.
3. Michael W.Passer, Ronald E.smith (2007), Psychology: The science of mind and
Behavior,3rd Edition Tata McGraw-Hill Edition.
4. Robert S.Feldman (2004) Understanding Psychology 6th Edition Tata McGraw – Hill.
5. Endler, N. S., & Summerfeldt, L. J. (1995). Intelligence. personality. psychopathology. and
adjustment. In D. H. Saklofske & M. Zeidner (Eds.). International handbook of personality
and intelligence (pp. 249-284). New York: Plenum Press.
6. Ford, M. E. (1994). A living systems approach to the integration of personality and
intelligence. In R. J. Sternberg. & P. Ruzgis (Eds.). Personality and intelligence
(pp. 188-21 7). New York: Cambridge University Press.
7. De Bono, E (1990) Lateral Thinking, Harper Perennial, New York.

HU5175 EDUCATION, TECHNOLOGY AND SOCIETY L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE DESCRIPTION
This course introduces students to multidisciplinary studies in Education, Technology and
Society. Students will get an understanding of the relationship between education, technology
and society. They will also learn about the long lasting impact of good education in a
technologically advanced society.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The course aims
 To help learners understand the basics of different types of technology utilised in the
field of education
 To make them realize the impact of education in society
 To make them evolve as responsible citizen in a technologically advanced society
LEARNING OUTCOMES
By the end of the course, learners will be able to
 Understand the various apps of technology apps and use them to access, generate and
present information effectively.
 Apply technology based resources and other media formats equitably, ethically and
legally.
 Integrate their technical education for betterment of society as well as their personal life.

UNIT I INDIAN EDUCATION SYSTEM

Gurukul to ICT education – Teacher as facilitator – Macaulay’s Minutes – English medium vs
Regional medium – Importance of Education in Modern India - Challenges in Education
UNIT II LEARNING THEORIES
Learning Theories – Behaviorism – Cognitivism – Social Constuctivism – Humanism Learning
Styles – Multiple Intelligences – Emotional Intelligence – Blooms Taxonomy

UNIT III TECHNOLOGICAL ADVANCEMENTS

Web tools – Social media in education – elearning – MOOCs – Mobile assisted learning –
Learning Apps – Blended learning - Self-directed learning
UNIT IV EDUCATIONAL TECHNOLOGY
Technological implications on Education – Teaching, Learning & Testing with Technology -
Advantages and drawbacks – Critical analysis on the use of technology
UNIT V ETHICAL IMPLICATIONS
Plagiarism – Online Copyright issues – Ethical and value implications of education and
technology on individual and society.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEACHING METHODS
Teaching modes include guest lectures, discussion groups, presentations, visual media, and a
practicum style of learning.
[

EVALUATION
As this is course is not a content based course, it focuses more on the ethical use of technology
in education and society, and so, evaluation can be based on assignments and discussions. So
there is no need for an end semester examination. Internals marks can be taken for the total
marks.
INTERNAL (100 % WEIGHTAGE)
(a) Written Test (40 marks)
(b) Assignment: Write a real time report of the technology use in any school / college (15 marks)
(c) Presentation: Students choose any one of the technological tools and present its relevance
to education and society (15 marks)
(d) Group discussion: Students discuss in groups on case studies relating to various challenges
in education and technology use in society (20 marks)
(e) Blog entry: Making weekly blog posts in Class Blog on the topics related to the course
posted by the instructor and commenting on others’ posts. (10 marks)
REFERENCES
1) Education and Social order by Bertrand Russel
2) Theories of learning by Bower and Hilgard
3) Technology and Society by Jan L Harrington
HU5176 PHILOSOPHY LT PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES
 To create a new understanding by teaching philosophy through a comparison of Indian
and Western traditions.
 To Fosters critical thinking and imagination by dealing with inter-related concepts in
literature and science.
 To bridge the gap between the sciences and humanities through introspective analyses.
 To nurture an understanding of the self and elucidates ways to progress towards a
higher understanding of one’s self and others.

UNIT I KNOWLEDGE 9
Knowledge (Vidya) Versus Ignorance (Avidya)- Brihadaranyaka Upanishad. Unity and
Multiplicity – Isha Upanishad. What is True Knowledge? Ways to True Knowledge. Introduction
to Philosophy of Yoga, Socratic Debate, Plato’s Views. Asking and Answering Questions to
Stimulate Critical Thinking and to Draw Ideas. Argumentative Dialogues. Dialectical Methods to
Arrive at Conclusions.

UNIT II ORIGIN 9
Origin of Universe And Creation – ‘Nasidiya Sukta’ in Relation With Big Bang Theory. Greek
Concept of Chaos. The Concept of Space – Space as the Final Goal – Udgitha. Relationship
Between Teacher And Student – The Knowledge Of Combinations, Body And Speech – Siksha
Valli – Taittriya Upanishad.

UNIT III WORD 9

Aum- Speech and Breath as Pair – Chandogya Upanishad and Brihadaryanaka Upanishad.
Significance of Chants, Structure of Language and Cosmic Correspondences. The Non-Dual
Word – Bhartrihari’s Vakyapadiyam. Sphota-Ultimate Reality Expressed Through Language.
Intention. Thought ‘Sabdanaor’ and Speaking.

UNIT IV KNOWLEDGE AS POWER/OPPRESSION 9

Power- as Self-Realization in Gita. Krishna’s Advice to Arjuna on How to Conquer Mind. Francis
Bacon – Four Idols – What Prevents One From Gaining Knowledge? Michel Foucault-
Knowledge as Oppression. Panopticon. Rtam (Truth) and Satyam (Eternal Truth).

UNIT V SELF KNOWLEDGE/BRAHMAN 9

Knowledge about Self, Transcendental Self. The Different Chakras and the Stages of
Sublimation. Philosophy of Yoga and Siva for Union of Mind and Body. Concept of Yin/Yang.
Aspects of the Feminine / Masculine.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Think sceptically, ask questions and to arrive at deductions.
2. Connect and relate different branches of thought.
3. Comprehends the relation between language, thought and action.
4. Arrive at a better understanding of self and others and forms a new outlook.

REFERENCES:
1. Swami Nikhilananda: The Upanishads, Swami Nikhilananda, Advaita Ashrama, Kolkata.
2. Swamy Tapasyananda: Srimad Bhagavad Gita, The Scripture of Mankind, Sri
Ramakrishna Math, Chennai.
3. Subrahmanyam, Korada: Vakyapadiyam of Bhartrhari Brahmakanda, Sri Garib Dass
series.
4. Swami Lokeswarananda: Chandogya Upanishad, Swami Lokeswarananda, Ramakrishna
Mission Institute of Culture, Kolkata.
 5. Brahma, Apuruseya: The Four Vedas: Translated in English.
6. Haich, Elizabeth: Sexual Energy and Yoga.
7. Bacon, Francis: Power as Knowledge
8. Vlastos, Gregory: Socrates Ironist and Moral Philosopher.
9. Plato: The Republic, Penguin.
10. Gutting, Garry: Foucault A Very Short Introduction, Oxford.

HU5177 APPLICATIONS OF PSYCHOLOGY IN EVERYDAY LIFE LTPC

3 003

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 7
Nature and fields.

UNIT II PSYCHOLOGY IN INDUSTRIES AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Job analysis; fatigue and accidents; consumer behavior.

UNIT III PSYCHOLOGY AND MENTAL HEALTH 11

Abnormality, symptoms and causes psychological disorders

UNIT IV PSYCHOLOGY AND COUNSELING 7

Need of Counseling, Counselor and the Counselee, Counseling Process, Areas of Counseling.

UNIT V PSYCHOLOGY AND SOCIAL BEHAVIOUR 11

Group, group dynamics, teambuilding, Prejudice and stereotypes; Effective Communication,
conflict and negotiation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS
1. Schultz, D. & Schultz, S.E. (2009). Psychology and Work Today (10th ed.). New
Jersey:Pearson/Prentice Hall
2. Butcher, J. N., Mineka, S., & Hooley, J. M. (2010). Abnormal psychology (14th ed.). New
York: Pearson
3. Gladding, S. T. (2014). Counselling: A comprehensive profession. New Delhi: Pearson
Education
4. Aronson, E., Wilson, T. D., & Akert, R. M. (2010). Social Psychology (7th Ed.).
Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall
 HSMC– ELECTIVES – HUMANITIES II (EVEN SEMESTER)

HU5271 GENDER, CULTURE AND DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
COURSE DESCRIPTION
This course offers an introduction to Gender Studies that asks critical questions about the
meanings of sex and gender in Indian society. The primary goal of this course is to familiarize
students with key issues, questions and debates in Gender Studies, both historical and
contemporary drawing from Indian literature and media studies, to examine cultural assumptions
about sex, gender, and sexuality. This course integrates analysis of current events through
student presentations, aiming to increase awareness of contemporary and historical
experiences of women, and of the multiple ways that sex and gender interact with class, caste
and other social identities. This course also seeks to build an understanding of the concepts of
gender, gender-based violence, sexuality, and rights and their impact on development through a
number of discussions, exercises and reflective activities.
OBJECTIVES
 To familiarize students with the concepts of sex and gender through literary and media
texts.
 To help students ask critical questions regarding gender roles in society.
 To provide students with the material to discuss gender issues such as gender based
discrimination, violence and development.
 To help students think critically about gender based problems and solutions.
LEARNING OUTCOMES
 Students will be able to critically read literary and media texts and understand the
underlying gender perspectives in them.
 Students will be able to analyse current social events in the light of gender perspectives.
 Students will be able to discuss, analyse and argue about issues related to gender and
their impact on society, culture and development.
UNIT I: INTRODUCTION TO GENDER
 Definition of Gender
 Basic Gender Concepts and Terminology
 Exploring Attitudes towards Gender
 Social Construction of Gender
Texts:
1. Sukhu and Dukhu (Amar Chitra Katha)
2. The Cat who Became a Queen (Folk tale, J. Hinton Knowles, Folk-Tales of Kashmir.
London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner, and Company, 1893, pp. 8-10.)
UNIT II: GENDER ROLES AND RELATIONS
 Types of Gender Roles
 Gender Roles and Relationships Matrix
 Gender-based Division and Valuation of Labour
Texts:
1. Muniyakka (Short Story, Lakshmi Kannan, Nandanvan and Other Stories, Hyderabad:
Orient Blackswan, 2011)
2. Video: Witness: Freeing Women From Cleaning Human Waste (2014, HRW, Manual
Scavenging, India)
UNIT III: GENDER DEVELOPMENT ISSUES
 Identifying Gender Issues
 Gender Sensitive Language
 Gender, Governance and Sustainable Development
 Gender and Human Rights
 Gender and Mainstreaming
TEXTS:
1. The Many Faces of Gender Inequality (Essay, Amartya Sen, Frontline, Volume 18 - Issue 22,
Oct. 27 - Nov. 09, 2001)
2. Tell Us Marx (Poem, Mallika Sengupta, Translated by Sanjukta Dasgupta)

UNIT IV: GENDER-BASED VIOLENCE

 The concept of violence
 Types of Gender-based violence
 The relationship between gender, development and violence
 Gender-based violence from a human rights perspective
Texts:
1. Lights Out (Play, Manjula Padmanabhan)
2. Lights Out (Video of play enacted)
UNIT V: GENDER AND CULTURE
 Gender and Film
 Gender, Media and Advertisement
Texts:
1. Mahanagar (Movie: Satyajit Ray)
2. Beti Bachao Beti Padhao Advertisements

READINGS: Relevant additional texts for readings will be announced in the class. Classes will
consist of a combination of activities: dialogue-based lectures, discussions, collaborative
learning activities, group work and in-class assignments.

ASSESSMENT AND GRADING:

Discussion & Classroom Participation: 20%
Project/Assignment: 30%
End Term Exam: 50%

HU5272 ETHICS AND HOLISTIC LIFE L T PC

3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
 To emphasize the meaning and nature of ethics, human values and holistic life for
leading a good, successful and happy life through continuous examination of thoughts
and conduct in day to day life.
 To understand the status and responsible role of individual in abatement of value crisis in
contemporary world in order to develop a civilized and human society. Understanding
the process of ethical decision making through critical assessment of incidents/cases of
ethical dilemmas in personal, professional and social life.
 To view the place of Ethics and Human Values in the development of individual and
society through identification and cross examination of life values and world view of
his/her role models in society.
UNIT I HUMAN LIFE, ITS AIM AND SIGNIFICANCE
The concept of a successful life, happy life and a meaningful life, Ethical and decision making
capability and its development: Meaning of Ethical dilemma, sharing real life experiences.

UNIT II CREATIVE AND LEADERSHIP ABILITY AND THEIR DEVELOPMENT

Intellectual, Emotional, Creative, Ethico - spiritual development, Aesthetic sense, Self-
dependency, Activeness, Development of positive attitude.

UNIT III HARMONY IN PERSONAL AND SOCIAL LIFE:

Concept of personal and group Ethics; Balance between - rights and duties-welfare of self and
welfare of all, creating a value based work culture in hostel, classroom and other places in the
campus and society.

UNIT IV CHARACTER, RIGHTEOUSNESS AND VIRTUES FOR A

MEANINGFUL LIFE
Egolessness, Humility, Righteousness, Purity, Truthfulness, Integrity, Self-restraint, Self-control,
Sense of responsibility, Empathy, Love, Compassion, Maitri / Comradeship, Cooperation,
Tolerance.

UNIT V DILEMMA BETWEEN MATERIALISTIC DEVELOPMENT AND

HUMAN WELFARE
Science, Technology, Consumerism, Relation with Nature and Environment, New dimension
of Global Harmony: Democracy, Equality, Social Justice

TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Enable students to understand the concept of contemporary ethics at different levels:
Individual, local and Global and enable them to cross examine the ethical and social
consequences of the decisions of their life-view and world view.
2. Develop the ability of students to create a balance between their individual freedom
and social responsibilities and enable them to identify the personal, professional and
social values and integrate them in their personality after cross examination.
3. Enable students to cross examine their earlier decisions taken in life and understand the
meaning of ethical dilemma to overcome the ethical dilemmas and engage in critical
reflection.
4. Develop positive habits of thought and conduct and work cohesively with fellow beings
who have variety of strengths, experiences, shortcomings and challenges, hence to
enable them to handle diverse type of personalities.
5. Enable students to develop a method for making ethically sound decisions for
themselves, within hostels, classrooms, university campus and society.
HU5273 LAW AND ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3

UNIT I THE LEGAL SYSTEM: SOURCES OF LAW AND THE COURT STRUCTURE 9
Enacted law -Acts of Parliament are of primary legislation, Common Law or Case law- Principles
taken from decisions of judges constitute binding legal rules. The Court System in India and
Foreign Courtiers. (District Court, District Consumer Forum, Tribunals, High Courts,
Supreme Court) Arbitration: As an alternative to resolving disputes in the normal courts, parties
who are in dispute can agree that this will instead be referred to arbitration.

UNIT II LAWS 9
Basic principles of contract law, sale of goods law, laws relating to industrial pollution,
accident, environmental protection, health and safety at work, patent law, constitutional law: the
supreme law of the land, Information technology law and cyber crimes.

UNIT III BUSINESS ORGANISATIONS 9

Sole traders (Business has no separate identity from you, all business property belongs to you).
Partnerships: Types of Partnerships - Limited Liability Partnership, General Partnership, Limited
Partnerships. Companies: The nature of companies, Classification of companies, Formation of
companies, Features of a public company, Carrying on business, Directors– Their Powers and
Responsibilities/Liabilities.

UNIT IV LAW AND SOCIETY 9

Interdisciplinary nature of law, legal ideologies/philosophy/ schools of jurisprudence.

UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9

Important legal disputes and judicial litigations

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

HU5274 FILM APPRECIATION L T PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE DESCRIPTION
This is an intensive course designed to promote comprehensive understanding and insights into
the nature of cinema and other related forms and practices. Movies, though at times are used
more as escapism, they are also a true art form and expressive tool used by writers, directors
and actors. This course will explore the aesthetics of cinema, the concepts behind storytelling
and various other elements of a film. It will also explore the impact of movies in our society and
in our lives. It also encourages students to use films as a medium to analyse visual texts and
read underlying messages.

OBJECTIVES:
 To help learners understand the various movie genres and its types.
 To understand various elements that contributes to film making.
 To make them realize the impact of film in society.
 To analyse the visual media and interpret the underlying messages.

UNIT I THE COMPONENTS OF FILMS 9

Story, Screenplay & Script – Actors – Director – Crew Members – Mis En Scene – Structure of A
Film – Narrative Elements – Linear & Non-Linear – Types of Movie Genres: Mysteries, Romantic
Comedies, Horror Etc.
UNIT II EVOLUTION OF FILM 9
History of Films – Early Cinema – Silent Movies – Talkies – Film Language, Form, Movement –
Film Theories – Realist, Auteurists, Feminist, Psychonalyic, Idealogical Theories.
UNIT III FILMS ACROSS THE WORLD 9
European Films – Russian Films – Japanese Films – Korean Films – Hollywood Film – Studio
Culture – All Time Great Movies.
UNIT IV INDIAN FILMS 9
The Early Era – History Of Indian Cinema – Movies for Social Change – Hindi Movies that
Created Impact – Regional Movies – Documentaries – Cultural Identity.

UNIT V INTERPRETING FILMS 9

Film Criticism & Appreciation – Censorship in Movies – Cultural Representation in Movies –
Television – New Media & Online Media – Films Beyond Entertainment.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Recognize types of films, their impact on society and their roles in our lives.
 Have an understanding of the concepts of storytelling, Mise en Scene, and other
elements of film making.
 Interpret the underlying messages in the movies.
Teaching Methods
 Each unit consists of reading materials, learning activities videos, websites. Students are
expected to watch movies sometimes in class and at times at home and discuss in class.
Evaluation
 As this is course is critical appreciation course on films, there is no written end semester
examination. The course is more on learning how to critically analyse a movie and
appreciate its finer elements. Therefore evaluation can be based on assignments and
discussions. Internals marks can be taken for the total marks.
Internal (100 % weightage)
 Assignment 1: Write a movie review with critical analysis (20 marks).
 Assignment2 : Write a script for a scene taken from a short story / novella (20 marks).
 Presentation: Students choose any one topic related to films and present it to the
audience. (25 marks)
 Group discussion : Students discuss in groups on the various aspects of movies and its
impact on society. (25 marks)
 Blog entry: Making weekly blog posts in Class Blog on the topics related to the course
posted by the instructor and commenting on others’ posts. (10 marks)

REFERENCES
1. A Biographical Dictionary of Film by David Thomson, Secker & Warburg, 1975
2. Signs and Meaning in the Cinema by Peter Wollen, Secker & Warburg, 1969
3. The World Viewed by Stanley Cavell 1971
4. Film Style and Technology: History and Analysis by Barry Salt, Starword, 1983
5. The Encyclopedia of Indian Cinema Edited by Ashish Rajadhyaksha and Paul Willemen,
BFI, 1994.
HU5275 FUNDAMENTALS OF LANGUAGE AND LINGUISTICS LTPC
3 003

OBJECTIVES
 To broadly introduce students to the formal and theoretical aspects of linguistics.
 To enable learners to understand the various practical applications of language and
recent findings in the field of applied linguistics.

CONTENTS : -

UNIT I LANGUAGE AND LINGUISTICS: AN OVERVIEW 9

Language and Linguistics-Linguistic Knowledge-Knowledge of Sound Systems & Words –
Creativity of Language – Relationship of form and meaning. Grammar – descriptive,
prescriptive, universal-Human Language – Animal Language – Sign Language- Computers and
Language.

UNIT II MORPHOLOGY - WORDS OF LANGUAGE 9

Content and function words – morphemes -free & bound –prefixes – suffixes – roots and stems
–inflectional and derivational morphology-compound words and their formation – malapropisms
– slips of the tongue.

UNIT III SYNTAX- THE SENTENCE PATTERNS OF LANGUAGE AND SEMANTICS-THE

MEANING OF LANGUAGE 9
Syntax : Rules of Syntax- Sentence Structure-Structural Ambiguity-Syntactic Categories.
Semantics: Lexical Semantics – Anomaly-Metaphors- Idioms- Synonyms – Antonyms –
Homonyms -Pragmatics– Speech Acts

UNIT IV PHONETICS – THE SOUNDS OF LANGUAGE 9

Speech sounds- Introduction to branches of Phonetics- The Phonetic Alphabet – IPA –
Consonants - Vowels – Diphthongs- Tone and Intonation.

UNIT V APPLIED LINGUISTICS - THE PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS OF LANGUAGE 9

Language learning and teaching (ELT)- lexicography-translation studies-computational
linguistics-neurolinguistics (speech pathology and language disorders)- forensic linguistics –
sociolinguistics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
Teaching Methods:
Lectures, discussion.

Evaluation Internal and External:

Internal: 2 written tests + assignments, seminars, project (50+15+15+20).
External: A 3 hour written exam (50 marks)
REFERENCES:
1. Victoria Fromkin, Robert Rodman, Nina Hyams.2019.An Introduction to
Language.USA.CENGAGE.11th edition
2. Cook. G,2003. Applied linguistics.UK: Oxford University Press.
HU5276 UNDERSTANDING SOCIETY AND CULTURE THROUGH LITERATURE L T P C
3 003
OBJECTIVES
 To internalize the importance of language by understanding its role in the transformation
of man.
 To look at language, literature and culture as locus of identity and change.
 To extract meaning from existing literatures and cultures.
 To identify meanings in modern life by reconnecting with lost cultures.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION
Why study literature? Tracing the origin – pictures. Tokens as precursors of writing.
Movement from three dimensions to two dimensions- Pictography. From visual to oral -
Logography. Reading out literature to young children- Edmund J Farrell.
UNIT II READING CULTURE
Reading culture through language, signs and consumables- Roland Barthes. Culture through
poems- Nissim Ezekiel’s ‘ The night of the Scorpion’ . ‘Nothing’s Changed’- Tatamkhulu Afrika-
Apartheid. Ruskin Bond- ‘Night train at Deoli’- How real life is different from movies.

UNIT III IDENTIFYING MEANING

Searching and locating meaning through literature. Looking for order in a chaotic world. The
Myth of Sisyphus (Albert Camus) and Adi Shankar’s ‘Jagat Mithya’- the world as an illusion. The
Indian version as ‘meaninglesss meaning’.
UNIT IV POST MODERNISM
‘If on a winter’s night a traveler’- Italo Calvino. The book about the reader- the experience
of reading as reading. Metafiction. Selfie Culture. Visual Culture as purpose of modern life.
UNIT V RETURNING TO PICTURES
Literature of the present- Emphasis on the visual world. Twitterature. SMS. Whatsapp language.
Consumer culture. Change in fixed gender notions. Interactive sessions. Introspection.
READING LIST
1. Bond, Ruskin: ‘Night train at Deoli’
2. Ezekiel, Nissim: ‘ The Night of the Scorpion’
3. Afrika,Tatamkhulu: ‘Nothing’s Changed’
4. Barthes, Roland: Mythologies
5. Shankaracharya: Viveka Chudamani
6. Camus, Albert- The Myth of Sisyphus
7. Calvino, Italo: If on a winter’s night a traveler
8. Farrell, Edmund J: ‘Listen, my children, and you shall read’

OUTCOMES
 Can identify the connections among language, literature and culture.
 Is able to relate between seemingly different aspects of life.
 Understands the fractions in modern life and can assimilate meanings.